Caravan
OWNER’S MANUAL
2008
2008 Caravan
81-226-0819 First Edition Printed in U.S.A.
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefor.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previ-
ously manufactured.
Copyright © 2007 Chrysler LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION
.............................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
...............................9
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
...............................97
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
................................... 219
5
STARTING AND OPERATING
.................................................321
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
...............................................409
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
...............................................431
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
..................................................489
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
..........................................497
10
INDEX
....................................................................507
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet
and various customer-oriented documents. You are
urged to read these publications carefully. Following the
instructions and recommendations in this manual will
help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with
the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will be
aware of all safety warnings.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained
technicians and genuine Mopart parts, and is interested
in your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
The detailed Index at the back of this manual contains a
complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual.
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION 5
1
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This manual contains WARNINGS against operating
procedures that could result in an accident or bodily
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures
that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not
read this entire manual you may miss important infor-
mation. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also appears on the Auto-
mobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window
on your vehicle, the vehicle registration and title.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove the VIN.
Vehicle Identification Number
6 INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
INTRODUCTION 7
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
m A Word About Your Keys ..................12
▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) .............12
m Sentry Keyt Immobilizer System .............15
▫ Replacement Keys ......................16
m Security Alarm System — If Equipped .........18
▫ Rearming Of The System .................18
m Illuminated Entry System — If Equipped .......20
m Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) — If Equipped .....21
▫ Using The RKE Transmitter ...............21
m Remote Starting System — If Equipped ........28
▫ How To Use Remote Start ................28
m Door Locks ............................31
▫ Manual Door Locks .....................31
▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped ..........32
m Windows .............................36
▫ Power Vent Windows — If Equipped ........36
▫ Power Windows .......................37
m Sliding Side Door ........................41
2
▫ Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped ......42
▫ Sliding Side Door Child Protection Lock ......46
m Liftgate ...............................48
▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped .............49
m Storage Bin Safety Warning .................52
▫ Safety Warnings .......................52
▫ Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Strap —
If Equipped ..........................54
▫ Reinstalling Storage Bin Cover Emergency
Release Strap .........................54
m Occupant Restraints ......................55
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts .....................57
▫ Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode –
If Equipped ..........................63
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners ...................64
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlertt) ..........................64
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women ............65
▫ Seat Belt Extender ......................66
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag . .66
▫ Airbag System Components ...............67
▫ Front Seat Airbag Features ................67
▫ Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls .....72
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) ...............78
▫ Integrated Child Seat — If Equipped ........80
▫ Child Restraints .......................81
m Rear Seat Delete Feature (Commercial Vehicles Only)
— If Equipped ..........................89
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Restraining Infants And Small Children With Seat
Delete Feature (Commercial Vehicles Only) ....90
m Engine Break-In Recommendations ...........93
m Safety Tips ............................93
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle ..............................93
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ....................94
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
2
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
with integrated ignition Key and a Wireless Ignition
Node (WIN) with integral ignition switch. You can insert
the double-sided key into the ignition switch with either
side up.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three of
which are detented and one spring-loaded. The detented
positions are OFF, ACC, and ON. The START position is
a spring-loaded momentary contact position. When re-
leased from the START position, the switch automatically
returns to the detented ON position.
Integrated Ignition Key
The integrated ignition key operates the ignition switch.
It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) trans-
mitter and a valet key, which stores in the rear of the
transmitter.
WIN Ignition Positions
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The valet key allows for entry into the vehicle should the
battery in the vehicle or the transmitter go dead. The
valet key is also for locking the glove box. You can keep
the valet key with you when valet parking.
To remove the valet key from the transmitter, slide the
mechanical latch at the top of the transmitter sideways
with your thumb and then pull the key out with your
other hand.
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided valet key into
the lock cylinder with either side up.
Tip Start Feature
1. Do not press the accelerator pedal during this process.
Valet Key Removal
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
2
2. Insert the integrated ignition key into the ignition
switch.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release it as soon as the starter engages.
The starter motor will continue to run and will disengage
automatically when the engine begins running.
Ignition Key Removal
Place the gear selector lever in PARK. Turn the ignition
key to the OFF position and then remove the key.
NOTE: Power Window switches will also remain active
for up to 90 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned OFF, depending upon the accessory delay setting.
Opening the front door will cancel this feature.
WARNING!
NEVER leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
If you open the driver’s door with the integrated ignition
key in the ignition, a chime will sound to remind you to
remove the key.
NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds
when the integrated ignition key is placed in the OFF or
ACC position.
SENTRY KEYT IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
The Sentry Keyt Immobilizer system prevents unautho-
rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses the factory-mated Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter with integrated key and Wireless Igni-
tion Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle opera-
tion. Therefore, only RKE transmitters that are pro-
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to crank
if an invalid RKE transmitter is used to operate the
ignition switch.
After turning the ignition switch to the ON position, the
Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light located on the
instrument cluster will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
it indicates that someone used an invalid RKE transmitter
to start the engine. Either of these conditions will result in
the engine being shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light, located on
the instrument cluster, turns on during normal vehicle
operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it
indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should
this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
2
NOTE:
•
The Sentry Keyt Immobilizer system is not compatible
with aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these
systems may result in vehicle starting problems and
loss of security protection.
•
Exxon/Mobil Speedpass™, additional RKE transmit-
ters, or any other transponder-equipped components
on the same key chain will not cause a fault unless the
additional part is physically held against the trans-
mitter being used to start the vehicle. Cell phones,
pagers, or other RF electronics will not cause interfer-
ence with this system.
All of the RKE transmitters provided with your new
vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only RKE transmitters that are programmed to
the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. Once a transmitter is programmed to a
vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
Always remove the keys from the vehicle and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of RKE trans-
mitters. Duplication of RKE transmitters may be per-
formed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer
Key Programming procedure. This procedure consists of
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
programming a blank transmitter to the vehicle electron-
ics. A blank transmitter is one that has never been
programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Keyt Immobilizer
system serviced, bring all vehicle RKE transmitters with
you to the authorized dealer.
Customer Key Programming
If you have two valid RKE transmitters with integrated
keys, you can program new transmitters to the system by
performing the following steps:
1. Insert the first valid integrated key into the ignition
switch and turn the ignition switch to the ON position for
at least three seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds.
Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and remove
the first key.
2. Insert the second valid integrated key and turn the
ignition switch to the ON position within 15 seconds.
After 10 seconds, a chime will sound and the Vehicle
Security Alarm Indicator Light will begin to flash. Turn
the ignition switch to the OFF position and remove the
second key.
3. Insert a blank integrated key into the ignition switch
and turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 60
seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound and
the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will stop
flashing, turn the ignition switch on again for three
seconds, and then turn it off.
The new integrated key is programmed. The Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter will also be pro-
grammed during this procedure.
Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys. If you
do not have a programmed RKE transmitter with inte-
grated key, contact your authorized dealer for details.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
2
NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your authorized
dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys-
tem’s memory. This will prevent the lost key from
starting your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be
reprogrammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to an
authorized dealer at the time of service to be repro-
grammed.
General Information
The Sentry Keyt system complies with FCC rules Part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undes-
ired operation.
SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm system monitors the vehicle
doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for
unauthorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the
system provides both audible and visual signals. For the
first three minutes the horn will sound and the headlights
and Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will flash
repeatedly. For an additional 15 minutes only the head-
lights and security telltale will flash. The engine will run
only if a valid key is used to start the vehicle.
Rearming Of The System
The Security System will rearm itself after the 15 addi-
tional minutes of headlights and Vehicle Security Alarm
Indicator Light flashing, if the system has not been
disabled. If the condition which initiated the alarm is still
present, the system will ignore that condition and moni-
tor the remaining doors and ignition.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Arming The System
Remove the key from the ignition switch and either press
a power door lock switch while the driver or passenger
door is open or press the LOCK button on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. After all the doors are
locked and closed the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly to signal
that the system is arming. The Vehicle Security Alarm
Indicator Light in the instrument panel cluster will flash
rapidly for about 16 seconds to indicate that the alarm is
being set. After the alarm is set, the Vehicle Security
Alarm Indicator Light, located in the lower center section
of the instrument cluster, will flash at a slower rate to
indicate that the system is armed.
NOTE: If the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light
stays on continuously during vehicle operation, have the
system checked by your authorized dealer.
Disarm The System
Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter
or insert a valid ignition key into the ignition switch and
turn the key to the ON position.
NOTE:
•
The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button
on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the
system.
•
The system remains armed during liftgate entry. Press-
ing the liftgate button will not disarm the system. If
someone enters the vehicle through the liftgate and
opens any door the alarm will sound.
•
When the system is armed, the interior power door
lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm system is designed to protect
your vehicle; however, you can create conditions where
the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
2
previously described arming sequences has occurred, the
system will arm regardless of whether you are in the
vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
system.
If the Security Alarm System is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the system will remain armed
when the battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will
flash, the horn will sound, and the ignition will not start
the vehicle. If this occurs, disarm the system.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the system in your absence,
the horn will sound three times when you unlock the
doors and the security telltale light will flash for 30
seconds. Check the vehicle for tampering.
Security System Manual Override
The system will not arm if you lock the doors using the
manual door lock plunger.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or open the
doors. This feature is only available if you have RKE.
The lights will fade to off after approximately 10 seconds
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
switch is turned ON.
NOTE:
•
The front courtesy overhead console, door courtesy
and liftgate lights do not turn on if the dimmer control
is in the interior lights ON position (extreme top
position).
•
The Illuminated Entry System will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the extreme downward position.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF
EQUIPPED
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate, and activate the PANIC alarm, optional power
liftgate, left power sliding door, and right power sliding
door from distances up to about 23 ft (7 m) using a
hand-held radio RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter
need not be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: If the key is in the ignition switch, then all
buttons on that RKE transmitter will be disabled. The
buttons on the remaining transmitters will work. If the
gear selector lever is out of PARK, all the RKE transmitter
buttons are disabled for all keys.
Two transmitters may be supplied with the vehicle.
Vehicles built without the powered options will be
equipped from the factory with three-button transmitters
and those built with power options will be equipped
with up to seven-buttons on the transmitter.
Using The RKE Transmitter
Three-button transmitters will provide basic UNLOCK,
LOCK and PANIC functions.
Three-Button RKE transmitter Fob With Integrated Key
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
2
Seven-button transmitters will provide functions that
allow the same basic operation as the three-button, but
may also be used to OPEN/CLOSE the optional power
liftgate, left power sliding door, or right power sliding
door. Other options of the system allow you to turn
ON/OFF the Sound Horn with Remote Lock and Flash
Lights with Remote Key LOCK features.
To UNLOCK Doors And Liftgate
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice to
unlock all doors and liftgate. The illuminated entry
system also turns on.
Remote Key Unlock
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s side door or all doors on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Remote Key
Unlock,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Pro-
grammable Features)” under “Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual for
details.
Seven-Button RKE transmitter Fob With Integrated Key
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, the Remote
UNLOCK feature can be enabled or disabled by per-
forming the following procedure:
1. Perform this operation while standing outside the
vehicle.
2. Press the LOCK button for five to ten seconds.
3. While the LOCK button is pressed, (after five seconds)
press the UNLOCK button. Release both buttons.
The Remote Key Unlock feature can be reactivated by
repeating the above procedure or by performing the
procedure in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC), Customer Programmable Features section on
vehicles so equipped.
To LOCK Doors And Liftgate
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter to lock all doors and liftgate. The horn will chirp once
to acknowledge the signal.
Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter.
If desired, the Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock feature
can be turned on and off by performing the following
procedure:
1. Perform this operation while standing outside the
vehicle.
2. Press the LOCK button for five to ten seconds.
3. While the LOCK button is pressed (after five seconds),
press the PANIC button. Release both buttons.
The Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock feature can be
reactivated by repeating this procedure or by performing
the procedure in the Electronic Vehicle Information Cen-
ter (EVIC), Customer Programmable Features section on
vehicles so equipped.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
2
Using The PANIC Alarm
To turn the PANIC Alarm feature ON or OFF, press and
hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at
least one second and release. When the PANIC Alarm is
on, the headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will
pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on.
The PANIC Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second
time or by turning the ignition switch to the ON position.
NOTE: When you turn off the PANIC Alarm by press-
ing the PANIC button a second time, you may have to be
closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of
the system.
Open/Close Power Liftgate — If Equipped
Press the LIFTGATE button twice on the RKE transmitter
within five seconds to Open/Close Power Liftgate. The
liftgate will beep for three seconds and then open/close.
If the button is pushed while the liftgate is being power
closed, the liftgate will reverse to the full open position.
If the liftgate is locked and is not equipped with a
powered liftgate, pressing the button twice will result in
the liftgate becoming unlocked for 30 seconds allowing
you to manually access the liftgate area.
The power liftgate may also be opened and closed by
pressing the button located on the overhead console.
If equipped with a rear interior switch on the left rear
pillar, pushing once will close the liftgate only. The
liftgate cannot be opened from this switch.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Open/Close Power Left Power Sliding Door — If
Equipped
Press the Left Power Sliding Door button twice on the
RKE transmitter within five seconds to Open/Close
Power Left Power Sliding Door. If the button is pushed
while the door is being power-closed, the door will
reverse to the full open position.
Open/Close Power Right Power Sliding Door — If
Equipped
Press the Right Power Sliding Door button twice on the
RKE transmitter within five seconds to Open/Close
Power Right Power Sliding Door. If the button on the
RKE transmitter is pushed while the door is being power
closed, the door will reverse to the full open position.
Turn Off Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock — If
Equipped
If desired, the Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock feature
can be turned on and off by performing the following
procedure:
1. Perform this operation while standing outside the
vehicle.
2. Press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter for
five to ten seconds.
3. While the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter is
pressed, (after five seconds) press the LOCK button.
Release both buttons.
The Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock feature can be
reactivated by repeating this procedure or by performing
the procedure in Section Four, “Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC), Customer Programmable Fea-
tures” on vehicles so equipped.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
2
The table below explains the Lamp Flash options.
Function
Which Turn
Signal Lamps
Number of
Flashes
Lock All 1
Unlock 1st Press Left Side 2
Unlock All
Doors
All 2
Left Side Left Side 2
Right Side Right Side 2
Liftgate All 2
Programming Additional RKE Transmitters
Refer to Sentry Keyt Immobilizer System “Customer
Key Programming.”
If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
contact your authorized dealer for details.
Replacing the RKE Transmitter Battery
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
Perchlorate Material — special handling may ap-
ply. See: www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
NOTE: Do not touch the battery terminals that are on
the back housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Battery access is through a door located on the rear of
the RKE transmitter. Insert a small, flat bladed screw-
driver into the slot and gently pry open the access door.
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch the battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
3. Reposition the access door panel over the battery
opening and snap into place.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions.
1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected
life of the battery is a minimum of three years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
Battery Replacement
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
2
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Remote Starting conveniently starts the engine from
outside the vehicle by using the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter while maintaining the Security Alarm
System. The Remote Starting System has a targeted range
of 328 ft (100 m). In order to Remote Start your vehicle,
the hood, liftgate, and all the doors must be closed and
the transmission gear selector lever in PARK.
NOTE: Remote Starting requires automatic transaxle-
equipped vehicles.
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will Remote Start:
•
Gear shift lever in PARK
•
Doors closed
•
Hood closed
•
Trunk closed
•
HAZARD switch off
•
BRAKE switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
•
Ignition key removed from ignition switch
•
Battery at an acceptable charge level, and
•
RKE PANIC button not pressed.
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Press and release the Remote Start button on
the RKE transmitter twice, within five seconds.
The parking lights will flash and the horn will
honk twice (if programmed). Then, the engine will start
and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for
a 15 minute cycle.
NOTE:
•
If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote Start
will automatically LOCK the doors.
•
The park lights will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
•
For security, power window and power sunroof op-
eration (if so equipped) are disabled when the vehicle
is in the Remote Start mode.
•
The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15 minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position
before you can repeat the start sequence for a third
cycle.
Remote Starting Button
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
2
To Enter the Vehicle After Remote Start
To enter the vehicle while the engine is running during a
Remote Start, you must first unlock the vehicle using the
UNLOCK button on the transmitter. After the vehicle is
unlocked, you have 60 seconds to enter the vehicle, insert
the key into the ignition switch and move it to the RUN
position, otherwise the engine will cancel Remote Start-
ing and automatically turn off.
To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle
Before the end of the 15 minute cycle, press and release
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle,
insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch
to the ON position.
NOTE:
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON position in
order to drive the vehicle.
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the message “Insert Key/
Turn To Run” will flash in the EVIC until you insert
the key. Once inserted, the message “Turn To Run”
will flash in the EVIC until you turn the key to run.
Cancel Remote Start
Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the following
occur:
•
The engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500.
•
Any engine warning telltale lights come on.
•
The hood is opened.
•
The Hazard Switch is pressed.
•
The transmission gear selector lever is moved out of
PARK.
•
Pressing the brake pedal.
•
Allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Turn Off the Engine While in Remote Start
Mode
Press and release the Remote Start button one time.
NOTE: To avoid inadvertent shut downs, the system
will disable the one time press of the Remote Start button
for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start
request.
When To Reset Remote Start
The vehicle can be started remotely up to a maximum of
two times. The vehicle is also allowed a maximum of one
failed start, where the Remote Starting sequence was
initiated but the engine stopped cranking without start-
ing. After either of these conditions, or if the Security
Alarm System is alarming, or if the PANIC button was
pressed, the vehicle must be reset by inserting a valid key
into the ignition switch, rotating to the RUN position,
and then rotating back to the LOCK/OFF position.
DOOR LOCKS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
Lock the doors by pushing down on the lock plungers on
each door trim panel.
Manual Door Lock Plunger
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
2
If the lock plunger is down when you shut the door, the
door will lock. Therefore, make sure the keys are not
inside the vehicle before closing the door.
WARNING!
•
For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
•
When leaving the vehicle always remove the key
and from the ignition lock, and lock your vehicle.
Do not leave unattended children in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised
use of vehicle equipment may cause severe per-
sonal injuries and death.
Power Door Locks — If Equipped
A power door lock switch is located on each front door
trim panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
Sliding Door Lock Features
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you press the power door lock switch while the key is
in the ignition, and any front door is open, the power
locks will not operate. This prevents you from acciden-
tally locking your keys in the vehicle. Removing the key
or closing the door will allow the locks to operate. A
chime will sound if the key is in the ignition switch and
a door is open, as a reminder to remove the key.
If you press the power door lock switch while the sliding
door is open, the sliding door will lock.
Driver Power Door Locks
1 - Unlock 2 - Lock
Front Passenger Power Door Switch Features
1 - Window Open/Close 3 - Doors Unlock
2 - Doors Lock
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
2
Lock Doors Automatically — If Equipped
If the Lock Doors Automatically feature is enabled, your
door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle’s
speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h).
The Lock Doors Automatically feature is enabled when
your vehicle is shipped from the assembly plant and can
be disabled by using the following procedure:
•
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles, refer to 9Personal Settings9 in the
EVIC section of this manual.
•
On non EVIC-equipped vehicles perform the follow-
ing steps:
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
2. Fasten your seat belt. (Fastening the seat belt will
cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this
programming procedure.)
3. Place the key into the ignition.
4. Within 15 seconds cycle the ignition key from the OFF
position to the ON/RUN position a minimum of four
times, ending in the OFF position (do not start the
engine).
5. Within 30 seconds, press the driver’s door lock switch
in the lock direction.
6. A single chime will be heard to indicate the feature has
been disabled.
7. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
8. If a chime is not heard, the program mode was
canceled before the feature could be disabled. If neces-
sary, repeat the above procedure.
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph (24 km/h)
feature can be reactivated by repeating the above men-
tioned procedure or by performing the procedure in the
EVIC, Customer Programmable Features section on ve-
hicles so equipped.
Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit — If
Equipped
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature unlocks
all of the doors of the vehicle when any door is opened.
This will occur only after the gear selector lever has been
shifted into the PARK position after the vehicle has been
driven (the gear selector lever has been shifted out of
PARK and all doors closed).
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature will not
operate if there is any manual operation of the power
door locks (lock or unlock).
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature can be
enabled or disabled by performing the following proce-
dure:
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
2. Fasten your seat belt. (Fastening the seat belt will
cancel any chimes that may be confusing during this
programming procedure.)
3. Insert the key into the ignition switch.
4. Within 15 seconds, cycle the ignition key from the OFF
position to the ON/RUN position a minimum of four
times ending in the OFF position (Do not start the
engine).
5. Within 30 seconds, press the driver’s door lock switch
in the unlock direction.
6. A single chime will sound to indicate the feature has
been changed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
2
7. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
8. If a chime is not heard, the program mode was
canceled before the feature could be changed. If neces-
sary, repeat the above procedure.
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature can be
reactivated by repeating the above mentioned procedure
or by performing the procedure in the EVIC, Customer
Programmable Features section on vehicles so equipped.
NOTE: Use the Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph (24
km/h) and Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit features
in accordance with local laws.
WINDOWS
POWER VENT WINDOWS — IF EQUIPPED
Switches on the driver’s door trim panel let the driver
operate the two vent windows from the driver’s seat.
Power Vent Window Switches
1 — Open 2 — Close
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
POWER WINDOWS
You can control all windows using switches on the
driver’s door trim panel. The switches will operate only
when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position
and during power accessory delay.
NOTE: Power Window switches will also remain active
for up to 90 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned OFF, depending upon the accessory delay setting.
Opening the front door will cancel this feature.
Driver’s Master Power Window Switches
Driver’s Power Window Switches
1 - Left Rear 3 - Left Front
2 - Right Rear 4 - Right Front
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
2
Power Window Lockout Switch — If Equipped
The driver may lock out all power windows by depressing
the bar switch just below the power window switches.
Front Passenger Power Window Switch
There is a single switch on the front passenger’s door
trim panel which operates the passenger door window
and locks and unlocks all doors. The switch will operate
only when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC
position and during power accessory delay.
Power Window Lockout Switch Front Passenger Power Switches
1 - Window Open/Close 3 - Doors Unlock
2 - Doors Lock
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Sliding Side Door Power Window Switch
There is a single switch on each sliding side door which
operates the sliding side door window.
The switches will operate only when the ignition switch
is in the ON or ACC position.
NOTE: The sliding door windows do not fully open,
stopping several inches above the window sill.
Auto Down Feature — If Equipped
The left and right front window switches may be
equipped with an auto down feature. Press the window
switch past the detent, release, and the window will go
down automatically.
To open the window part way, press the window switch
part way and release it when you want the window to
stop.
The power window switches remain active for up to 90
seconds (depending on the accessory delay setting) after
the ignition switch has been turned off. Opening a
vehicle front door will cancel this feature.
Sliding Door Power Window Switch
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
2
Auto Up Feature With Anti–Pinch Protection — If
Equipped
The left front window switch may be equipped with an
Auto Up feature. Lift the window switch to the second
detent, release, and the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release when you want the window to
stop.
NOTE:
•
If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-
close, it will reverse direction and then stop. Remove
the obstacle and use the window switch again to close
the window.
•
Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto-
close. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the first
detent and hold to close window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to
clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from
the window path before closing.
Auto Up Reset — If Equipped
To reactivate the Auto Up feature, perform the following
steps after vehicle power is restored:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue to
hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after
the window is fully open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting.
SLIDING SIDE DOOR
The sliding door may be opened from the inside or the
outside. Pull outward on exterior handle to open the
sliding door. The sliding door inside handle functions by
rocking forward and back. Rocking the handle back-
wards opens the door and rocking forward releases the
hold open latch in order to close the door.
To keep your door operating properly, observe the fol-
lowing guidelines:
•
Always open the door smoothly.
•
Avoid high impacts against the door stop when open-
ing the door. This is very important when your vehicle
is parked on an incline as the door will slide faster in
the downhill direction.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
2
•
There is a hold-open latch that is activated when the
sliding door is fully opened. This latch will keep your
sliding door open on any incline. To close the sliding
door after the hold-open latch is activated, you must
rock the inside handle forward or pull outward on the
outside handle.
Always make sure that the sliding door is fully latched
anytime the vehicle is in motion.
NOTE: The left side sliding door cannot be opened
while the fuel door is open. This feature operates only
when the sliding door is fully closed prior to opening the
fuel door.
POWER SLIDING SIDE DOOR — IF EQUIPPED
The power sliding door may be opened manually or by
using the buttons on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter.
Press the button on the transmitter twice within five
seconds, to open a power sliding door. When the door is
fully open, pressing the button twice within five seconds
a second time will close the door.
There are also power sliding side door switches located
on the trim panel just in front of the power sliding door
for the rear seat passengers. Pressing the switch once will
open the power sliding door. When the door is fully open
pressing the switch a second time will close the door.
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The power sliding side door must be unlocked
before the power sliding door switches will operate.
If the inside or outside door handles are used while the
power sliding side door is activated, the power sliding
door feature will be canceled and the door must be
opened or closed manually.
To avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding
doors from the rear seats, press the power sliding door
master lock button, located in the overhead console, to
disable the switches for the rear seat passengers.
NOTE:
•
If anything obstructs the power sliding side door
while it is closing or opening, the door will automati-
cally reverse to the closed or open position, provided
it meets sufficient resistance.
•
The left side sliding door cannot be opened while the
fuel door is open. This feature operates only when the
sliding door is fully closed prior to opening the fuel
door.
Power Sliding Door Detail
1 — Heated Seat Switch 4 — Door Handle
2 — Power Window Switch
5 — Power Sliding Door
Switch
3 — Manual Lock
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
2
•
If the power sliding side door is not in the full open or
close position, it will fully open when a power sliding
door switch is pressed. To close the door, wait until it
is fully open and then press the switch again.
•
The power sliding side door switches will not operate
if the transmission gear selector lever is in gear or the
vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h).
•
If the power sliding door encounters multiple obstruc-
tions within the same cycle, the system will automati-
cally stop and must be opened or closed manually.
WARNING!
You, or others, could be injured if caught in the path
of the sliding door. Make sure the door path is clear
before closing the door.
Power Sliding Side Door Open Flash
The left and right exterior hazard lights will flash for 12
seconds when either sliding door is opened. This will
alert other drivers in the area that passenger(s) could be
entering or exiting the vehicle.
The Sliding Side Door Open Flash can be enabled or
disabled by performing the following procedure:
1. Place the key in the ignition switch.
2. Cycle the ignition switch ON/OFF four times ending
in the OFF position. (Do not start the engine).
3. Within 10 seconds of the final cycle, press the hazard
switch.
4. A single chime will sound to signify that you have
successfully completed the programming.
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
You can turn the feature back on by repeating the above
mentioned procedure.
Power Sliding Side Door Master Lock Switch
The power sliding side doors may also be opened by
pressing the switches on the overhead console or the
switches located on the trim panel just in front of the
sliding door.
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the second row power sliding door
switches may be overridden by pressing the Master Lock
Out Switch located in the front overhead console to the
ON position.
Overhead Console Power Sliding Door Master Switch
1 — Left Door 3 — Right Door
2 — Liftgate 4 — Master Lock
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
2
Sliding Side Door Child Protection Lock
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the sliding doors are equipped with a
child protection door lock system.
NOTE: When the child lock system is engaged, the door
can be opened only by using the outside door handle
even though the inside door lock is in the unlocked
position.
To Engage The Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the sliding side door.
2. Slide the child lock control inward (toward the ve-
hicle) to engage the Child Protection Door Lock.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door.
Child Protection Door Lock
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•
After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock, al-
ways test the door from the inside to make certain it is
in the desired position.
•
When the Child Protection Door Lock system is en-
gaged, (even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked
position) the door can be opened only by using the
outside door handle, the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter, the switches on the overhead console, or
the switches located on the trim panel just in front of
the power sliding door.
•
The power sliding side door will operate from the
switches located on the trim panel just in front of the
power sliding door, regardless of the Child Protection
Door Lock lever position. To avoid unintentional
operation of the power sliding door from the rear
seats, press the Master Lock Out Switch located in
the front overhead console to the ON position.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the sliding doors can only be opened
from the outside door handle or the switches located
on the trim panel just in front of the power sliding
door when the child protection locks are engaged.
To Disengage The Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the sliding side door.
2. Slide the child lock control outward (away from the
vehicle) to disengage the Child Protection Door Lock.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door (if
equipped).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
2
LIFTGATE
On vehicles equipped with power locks, the liftgate can
be unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter button, or by activating the power door lock
switches located on the front doors.
To open the liftgate, depress the liftgate release handle
located on the underside of the license plate bar and pull
the liftgate open with one fluid motion.
If the liftgate is locked and is not equipped with the
power liftgate feature, pressing the button on the RKE
transmitter will result in the liftgate becoming unlocked
for 30 seconds allowing you to manually access the
liftgate area.
Liftgate Handle Location
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
POWER LIFTGATE — IF EQUIPPED
The power liftgate may be opened manually or by using
the button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit-
ter. Press the button on the transmitter twice within five
seconds, to open the power liftgate. When the liftgate is
fully open, pressing the button twice within five seconds,
a second time, will close the liftgate.
When the RKE transmitter button is pressed and the
Flash Lights feature is enabled, the tail lights will flash to
signal that the liftgate is opening or closing.
The power liftgate may also be opened and closed by
pressing the button located on the front overhead con-
sole.
Overhead Console Master Power Switch Detail
1 — Left Door 3 — Right Door
2 — Liftgate 4 — Master Lock
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
2
The power liftgate may be closed by pressing the button,
located in the upper left trim in the liftgate opening.
Pushing once will only close the liftgate. This button
cannot be used to open the liftgate.
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
NOTE:
•
If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it
meets sufficient resistance.
•
There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the
liftgate opening. Light pressure anywhere along these
strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open
position.
Liftgate Rear Switch
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
The power liftgate must be in the full open or close
positions for any of the buttons to operate. If the
liftgate is not in the full open or close positions, it must
be opened or closed manually.
•
If the liftgate release button is activated while the
power liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the
full open position.
•
The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the
transmission gear selector lever is in gear or the
vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h).
•
The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
below 212°F (224°C) or temperatures above 143°F
(62°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice
from the liftgate before pressing any of the power
liftgate buttons.
•
If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
within the same cycle, the system will automatically
stop and must be opened or closed manually.
WARNING!
•
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison-
ous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
•
If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
2
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with tempera-
ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
STORAGE BIN SAFETY WARNING
Safety Warnings
WARNING!
Always close the storage bin covers when your ve-
hicle is unattended. Do not allow children to have
access to the second row seat storage bins. Once in
the storage bin, young children may not be able to
escape. If trapped in the storage bin, children can die
from suffocation or heat stroke.
WARNING!
In an accident, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
•
DO NOT drive the vehicle with the storage bin
covers open.
•
Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched
while the vehicle is in motion.
•
DO NOT use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must be flat and locked to
avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,
which have minimal clearance to the cover.
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Your vehicle may be built with a release strap or
release lever attached to the Storage Bin Cover latch
mechanism.
Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever — If
Equipped
As a security measure, your vehicle may be built with a
Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release lever built into the
storage bin cover latching mechanism.
NOTE: In the event of an individual being locked inside
the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be opened from
inside of the bin by pushing on the glow-in-the-dark
lever attached to the storage bin cover latching mecha-
nism.
Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
2
Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Strap — If
Equipped
As a security measure, your vehicle may be built with a
Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release strap built into the
storage bin cover latching mechanism.
NOTE: In the event of an individual being locked inside
the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be opened from
inside of the bin by pulling on the glow-in-the-dark strap
attached to the storage bin cover latching mechanism.
Reinstalling Storage Bin Cover Emergency
Release Strap
If the storage bin cover strap disengages from the latch, it
can be reinstalled by inserting the loose end of the strap
into the latch mechanism.
Push the strap into the latch mechanism until it engages
around the latch post.
Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Strap
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Do not use the storage bin emergency release
strap to lift the storage bin cover. The strap is intended
for emergency release only.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
•
Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating
positions
•
Pretensioning and load-limiting retractors for the front
seat belts
•
Advanced multistage driver and new active-vent front
passenger airbags
•
An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
wheel
•
Knee Bolsters/Blockers for front seat occupants
•
Front seat belt retractors incorporate pretensioners to
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant
energy during an impact event.
Reinstalling Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Strap
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
2
•
All seat belt systems (except the driver’s, Swivel n’ Go,
and third row center position) include Automatic
Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the seat belt
webbing into position by extending the belt all the
way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired
length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in
a seat.
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-size
seat belts, your seat belts or the Lower Anchors and
Tether for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to
hold infant and child restraint systems.
NOTE: The front airbags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the airbag to have different rates of
inflation that are based on collision severity.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seats in your vehicle are equipped with Lap/
Shoulder Belts.
The belt webbing in the retractor is designed to lock
during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature
allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with
you under normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt
will lock and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of
the vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING!
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
WARNING!
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
2
WARNING!
•
Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
•
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas-
sengers safe, too.
WARNING!
Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belt. People belted together can crash into one an-
other in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never
use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. The seat belt latch plate is near the seatback of the
front seats and next to your arm in the rear seats. Grasp
the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate
up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go
around your lap.
WARNING!
A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal
injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your stron-
gest bones will take the force in a collision.
WARNING!
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
Latch Plate
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
2
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click”.
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well.
In a sudden stop you could move too far forward,
increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat
belt snugly.
Latch Plate To Buckle
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be
at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as pos-
sible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight.
If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it to
your authorized dealer and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
Removing Slack From Belt
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
2
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Third Row Center Shoulder Belt Instructions
The shoulder belt for the third row center seat is located
in the headliner slightly behind the third row seat.
Pull the strap down and secure the small latch plate of
the lap belt into the small buckle until you hear a “click”.
Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. When the belt
is long enough to fit, insert the large latch plate into the
buckle until you hear a “click”
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt.
To release the small latch plate, position the end of the
large latch plate against the red button on the small
buckle and push upward. Reinstall the latch plates into
the headliner.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front seats and the second row outboard seats, the
shoulder belt anchorage can be adjusted upward or
downward to help position the belt away from your
neck. The upper anchorage can be adjusted upward by
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
pushing anywhere on the anchorage. To move the an-
chorage downward, squeeze the actuation buttons while
simultaneously pushing down on the anchorage assem-
bly.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode – If
Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The automatic locking mode is avail-
able on all passenger-seating positions with a combina-
tion lap/shoulder belt.
When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
Use The Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety
seat is installed in a passenger seating position. Children
12 years old and younger should be properly restrained
in the rear seat whenever possible.
How To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap/shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the automatic locking mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow
it to retract completely to disengage the automatic lock-
ing mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
2
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices improve the performance of the seat belt
by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early
in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the front airbags, the
pretensioners are single use items. After a collision that is
severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners,
both must be replaced.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlertT)
If the occupied driver’s seat belt has not been buckled
within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle
speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), BeltAlertt will
alert the driver to buckle the seat belt. The driver should
also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Once the warning is triggered, BeltAlertt will continue to
chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96
seconds or until the driver’s seat belt is buckled.
BeltAlertt will be reactivated if the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle
speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
BeltAlertt Programming
BeltAlertt can be enabled or disabled by your authorized
dealer or by following these steps:
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON
or START position. DaimlerChrysler does not recom-
mend deactivating BeltAlertt.
1. With all doors closed and the ignition switch in any
position except ON or START, buckle the driver’s seat
belt.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (engine
does not need to be running), and wait for the Seat Belt
Warning Light to turn off.
3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the
ON/RUN position, unbuckle and then re-buckle the
driver’s seat belt at least three times within 60 seconds,
ending with the seat belt buckled.
NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn on
while unbuckling and off while re-buckling the seat belt.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. A single
chime will sound to signify that you have successfully
completed the programming.
BeltAlertt can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.
NOTE: Although BeltAlertt has been deactivated, the
Seat Belt Warning Light will continue to illuminate while
the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled.
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancies. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
2
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex-
tender and stow it.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug, and in the recommended seating
positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag
This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front
passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s front airbag is mounted in the
center of the steering wheel. The passenger’s front airbag
is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove
compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on
the airbag covers.
NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal
regulations that allow less forceful deployment.
The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. This
may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation
that are based on collision severity and occupant size.
This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental
Seat Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect
the driver, front, and rear passengers sitting next to a
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
window. If the vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags,
they are located above the side windows and their covers
are also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim; but they will open to allow airbag deployment.
Airbag System Components
The airbag system consists of the following:
•
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•
Airbag Telltale Light
•
Driver Airbag
•
Front Passenger Airbag
•
Front and Side Impact Sensors
•
Steering Wheel and Column
•
Instrument Panel
•
Seat Belt Reminder Light
•
Knee Impact Bolster
•
Front Seat Belt Retractor Pretensioners
•
Front Seat Track Position Sensors
•
Supplemental Seat Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains
(SABIC) — If Equipped
•
Front Seat Side-mounted (Thorax) Airbags — If
Equipped
Front Seat Airbag Features
The front airbag system has dual-stage driver and front
passenger airbags. This system provides output appro-
priate to the level of crash severity as determined by the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) and the impact
sensors at the front of the car.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
2
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires airbag deployment. The timing of
the second stage determines whether the output force is
low, medium, or high. If a low output is sufficient to meet
the need, the second stage is expended later in the crash
event.
Driver Airbag Special Features
Driver airbag deployment and force level is controlled by
the driver’s seat position as well as impact severity. Use
of special inflators result in a very compact driver’s side
airbag.
In addition to the small size, the inflating gases exit
through strategically placed vents, which direct the gas
away from the occupant.
Front Passenger Airbag Special Features
A new active venting front passenger airbag is designed
to reduce the risk of occupants who may be out of
position by the use of active vents positioned on each
side of the airbag.
Supplemental Front Seat-Mounted Thorax Side
Airbags — If Equipped
Front seat-mounted side (Thorax) airbags provide en-
hanced protection and work together with supplemental
Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to help protect
an occupant during a side impact. The seat-mounted side
airbag is marked with an airbag label sewn into the
outboard side of the seat.
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
When the airbag deploys, it opens the seam between the
front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each airbag
deploys independently, that is a left side impact deploys
the left airbag only and a right-side impact deploys only
the right airbag.
WARNING!
•
Do not put anything on or around the airbag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the airbags and you could be injured
because the airbag inflation capability may be
compromised. The protective covers for the airbag
cushions are designed to open only when the
airbags are inflating.
•
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side airbags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could
be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Thorax Airbag Label
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
2
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) — If Equipped
SABIC Airbags offer side-impact and vehicle rollover
protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in
addition to that provided by the body structure. Each
airbag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the
head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential
for side-impact head injuries. The curtains deploy down-
ward, covering both windows on the impact side.
NOTE: Should a vehicle rollover occur, the SABIC
curtains on both sides of the vehicle are deployed.
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim; but they will open to allow airbag deployment.
The system includes sensors adjacent to both front and
rear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy during
an impact severe enough to require airbag occupant
protection.
WARNING!
If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Side
Airbag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC), do not stack
luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the
location of the SABIC. The area where the side
curtain airbag is located should remain free from any
obstructions.
Airbags inflate in moderate to high speed impacts. Along
with seat belts and pretensioners, front airbags work with
the knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the
driver and front passenger. Side airbags also work with
seat belts to improve occupant protection.
The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to
severe frontal collisions. If your vehicle is equipped, the
side airbag on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
moderate to severe side collisions. In certain types of
collisions, both the front and side airbags may be trig-
gered. However, even in collisions where the airbags
work, you need the seat belts to keep you in the right
position for the airbags to protect you properly.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying airbag.
1. Children 12 years old and younger should always
ride buckled up in a rear seat.
Infants in rear-facing child restraints should NEVER ride
in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag.
An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to
infants in that position.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (see Section on Child Restraints should be
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front
passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded, move the
seat as far back as possible, and use the proper child
restraint. Refer to the section on Child Restraints.
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should wear their lap and shoulder
belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the front airbags
room to inflate.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
2
4. If your vehicle has side airbags, do not lean against
the door, airbags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door.
5. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under (If You Need Assistance( in Section 9 of this
manual.
WARNING!
Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belts even though you have airbags.
WARNING!
•
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front airbag deployment could cause
serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit
back, comfortably extending your arms to reach
the steering wheel or instrument panel.
•
Side airbags also need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door. Sit upright in the center of the
seat.
Airbag Deployment Sensors and Controls
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
required for this vehicle.
The ORC determines if a frontal or side collision is severe
enough to require the airbags to inflate. Based on the
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
impact sensors signals, a central electronic ORC deploys
the front airbags, side inflatable airbag curtains, side seat
thorax airbags, and front seat belt pretensioners as re-
quired for each type of impact.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START
or ON position. These include all of the components
listed above except the steering wheel and column,
instrument panel, and seat belt reminder light. If the key
is in the OFF position, in the ACC position, or not in the
ignition, the airbags are not on and will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
will deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Also, the ORC turns on the AIRBAG warning
light in the instrument panel for approximately
four to six seconds for a self-check when the
ignition is first turned on. After the self-check,
the AIRBAG warning light will turn off. If the ORC
detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns
on the AIRBAG warning light, either momentarily or
continuously. Asingle chime will sound if the light comes
on again after initial start up.
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru-
ment cluster AIRBAG warning light if a malfunction is
noted. The diagnostics also record the nature of the
malfunction.
WARNING!
Ignoring the AIRBAG light in your instrument panel
could mean you won’t have the airbags to protect you
in a collision. If the light does not come on, stays on
after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you
drive, have the airbag system checked right away.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
2
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Impact Sensors trigger airbag deployment in front and
side impacts, and aid the ORC in determining appropri-
ate response to impact events. Additional sensors in the
ORC determine the level of airbag deployment and
provide verification.
Acceleration Sensors
Acceleration Sensors trigger airbag deployment based on
dramatic acceleration change of the vehicle.
Pressure Sensors
Pressure Sensors trigger airbag deployment based on
door cavity pressure changes.
Rollover Sensors
Rollover Sensors trigger airbag deployment in the event
of vehicle rollover and aid the ORC in deploying Side
Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) for rollover events.
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) — If Equipped
The ORC deploys the SABIC during collision with other
vehicles and during collisions where the impact is con-
fined to a particular area of the vehicle — such as
collisions with poles, trees or similar objects.
It will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the
vehicle.
NOTE: The ORC does detect and protect for rollover
when equipped with SABIC airbags.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment, and
the vehicle communication network intact, and the
power intact, the Enhanced Accident Response System
performs the following functions:
•
Cuts off fuel to the engine.
•
Flashes hazard lights.
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Turns on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
removed.
•
Unlocks the doors automatically.
If A Deployment Occurs
The airbag systems are designed to deploy when the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) detect a moderate-
to-severe collision, to help restrain the driver, front
passenger and rear passengers, and then immediately
deflate.
NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to
need airbag protection will not activate the system. This
does not mean something is wrong with the airbag
system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
•
The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-
sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
•
As the airbags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
2
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your
clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instruc-
tions for cleaning.
•
It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the airbags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front passenger seat
belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Also, have the Occupant
Restraint Controller System serviced as well.
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING!
•
Modifications to any part of the airbag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the airbag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
•
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system.
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced
airbag system. The airbag may inflate accidentally or
may not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
advanced airbag system service. If your seat, includ-
ing your trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced
in any way (including removal or loosening/
tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle
to your authorized dealer. Only manufacturer ap-
proved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary
to modify an advanced airbag system for persons
with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Perchlorate Material — special handling may ap-
ply. See: www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Airbag Light
You will want to have the airbags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. While
the airbag system is designed to be mainte-
nance free, if any of the following occurs, have
an authorized dealer service the system immediately.
•
The AIRBAG light does not come on during the
approximately four to six seconds when the ignition
switch is first turned ON.
•
The light remains on after the approximately four to
six-second interval.
•
The light comes on and remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The airbags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
2
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
proper airbag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In the event of an accident, your vehicle is designed to
record up to approximately five seconds of specific
vehicle data parameters (see the following list) in an
event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag de-
ployment, or near deployment, and up to a quarter-
second of high-speed deceleration data during and/or
after airbag deployment. EDR data are ONLY recorded if
an airbag deploys, or nearly deploys, and are otherwise
unavailable.
NOTE:
1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag
sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica-
tive of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag
deployment.
2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be
recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).
In conjunction with other data gathered during a com-
plete accident investigation, the electronic data may be
used by DaimlerChrysler Corporation and others to learn
more about the possible causes of crashes and associated
injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor-
mance. In addition to crash investigations initiated by
DaimlerChrysler Corporation, such investigations may
be requested by customers, insurance carriers, govern-
ment officials, and professional crash researchers, such as
those associated with universities, and with hospital and
insurance organizations.
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
DaimlerChrysler Corporation (regardless of initiative),
the company or its designated representative will first
obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for
the vehicle (usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to
download data by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e.,
pursuant to a warrant). A copy of the data will be
provided to the custodial entity upon request. General
data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes
may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash
databases, such as those maintained by the U.S. govern-
ment and various states. Data of a potentially sensitive
nature, such as would identify a particular driver, ve-
hicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential
data will not be disclosed by DaimlerChrysler
Corporation to any third party except when:
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
preserved.
2. Used in defense of litigation involving a
DaimlerChrysler Corporation product.
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant.
4. Otherwise required by law.
Data Parameters That May Be Recorded:
•
Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning light status for
electronically-controlled safety systems, including the
airbag system
•
Airbag disable light status (if equipped)
•
9Time9 of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition
cycles and vehicle mileage)
•
Airbag deployment level (if applicable)
•
Impact acceleration and angle
•
Seat belt status
•
Brake status (service and parking brakes)
•
Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
2
•
Engine control status (including engine speed)
•
Transmission gear selection
•
Cruise control status
•
Traction/stability control status
•
Tire pressure monitoring system status – if equipped
Integrated Child Seat — If Equipped
Operating instructions for the second row bench seat
with Integrated Child Seat are included with the seat. If
the instructions are not with the seat or in the Owner’s
Manual Package, replacement instruction can be ob-
tained.
To obtain Integrated Child Seat replacement instruc-
tions: Refer to Publication Order Forms at the back of this
manual and specify publication number 81–016–8050.
Second Row Bench Seat With Integrated Child Seat
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times — babies and children, too. Every state in the
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years and younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a missile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap could
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
Infants and Small Children
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat owner’s manual to ensure you have the right seat for
your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your child.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
2
•
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
carriers and 9convertible9 child seats. Both types of
child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/
shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage
system. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tether for CHil-
dren (LATCH)” later in this section.
•
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). 9Convertible9 child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
less than one year old.
•
Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger
airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe
injury or death to infants in this position.
•
Rearward-facing child seats and infant carriers must
NEVER be used while the second row Swivel ’n Go
seats are in the rearward-facing position.
WARNING!
Never place any child seat or infant carrier in the
Swivel ’n Go seat while it is in the rearward-facing
position. The swivel seat should be locked in the
forward position when using any child seat or infant
carriers, with the vehicle in motion. Failure to do so
could result in serious injury or even death.
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Older Children and Child Restraints
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are
older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are older
than one year. These child seats are also held in the
vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child
restraint anchorage system. Refer to “Lower Anchors and
Tether for CHildren (LATCH)” later in this section.
An aftermarket belt-positioning booster seat is for chil-
dren weighing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still
too small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belts. If the
child can not sit with knees bent over the vehicles seat
cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback,
they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child
and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/
shoulder belt. (Some booster seats are equipped with a
front shield and are held in the vehicle by the lap
portion.)
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
•
Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
•
The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
•
Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
2
•
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. If this doesn’t
help, move the child to the center rear seating position
and use the lap belt. Never allow a child to put the
shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back.
NOTE: For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1-866-SEATCHECK.
WARNING!
•
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
•
A rearward-facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing child re-
straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy-
ing passenger airbag which may cause severe or
fatal injury to the infant.
•
Occupants riding in Swivel ’n Go seating must be
wearing their seat belt and the seat must be locked
in either the forward or rearward position. Failure
to do so could result in serious injury or even
death.
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child
restraint:
•
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle
where you will use it, before you buy it.
•
The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
•
Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
•
The passenger seat belts are equipped with cinching
latch plates, which are designed to keep the lap
portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. Pulling up on the
shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt will tighten
the belt. The cinching latch plate will keep the belt
tight, however, any seat belt system will loosen with
time, so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if
necessary.
•
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the
belt several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate
into the buckle with the release button facing out.
•
If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the buckle
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle
again. If you still can’t make the child restraint secure,
try a different seating position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
2
•
Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
•
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Don’t leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and
cause serious personal injury.
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
Each vehicle, except commercial cargo vehicles, is
equipped with the child restraint anchorage system
called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and
Tether for CHildren. Two LATCH child restraint anchor-
age systems are installed on all second-row seats and in
the center position on all 3rd row fold-in-floor seats.
Second-row seats also feature tether strap anchorages,
located in the rear surface of the seatback. In addition, all
third row fold-in-floor seats are equipped with a child
restraint tether anchor at the center seating position.
When using the tether anchorages in the outboard seat-
ing positions, ensure that the strap is routed underneath
the top of the seatback and the head restraint.
LATCH Anchorages
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
When using the tether anchorages in the center position
on third row fold-in-floor seating, ensure that the strap is
routed underneath the top of the seatback and the head
restraint.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
Child restraint systems having attachments designed to
connect to the lower anchorages are now available. Child
restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection
to the seatback tether anchorage have been available for
some time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers
will provide add-on tether strap kits for some of their
older products.
NOTE: If your child restraint seat is not LATCH com-
patible, install the restraint using the vehicle seat belts.
Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
2
Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to
passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years, child
restraint systems having attachments for those anchor-
ages will continue to have features for installation in
vehicles using the lap or lap/shoulder belt. They will also
have tether straps, and you are urged to take advantage
of all of the available attachments provided with your
child restraint in any vehicle.
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts
not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should
stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.
Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are
not toys and should not be played with, and never leave
your child unattended in the vehicle.
Installing the Child Restraint System
We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Many,
but not all restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the
strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some
rearward-facing infant restraints will also be equipped
with a tether strap, a hook and means for adjusting the
tension in the strap.
In general, you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower
straps and tether straps so that you can more easily attach
the hook or connector to the lower anchorages and tether
anchorages. Then tighten all three straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we
have described here. Again, carefully follow the instruc-
tions that come with the child restraint system.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet could be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
REAR SEAT DELETE FEATURE (COMMERCIAL
VEHICLES ONLY) — IF EQUIPPED
Commercial cargo vehicles are not designed for use as a
family vehicle and are not intended for carrying children
in the front passenger seat. However, if you must carry a
child in a vehicle without a rear seat, the passenger seat
should be moved to the full rearward position and the
child must be in a proper restraint system based on it’s
age, size and weight. NEVER carry a child in a rear facing
infant carrier in a vehicle without rear seats. In an
accident, serious injury or death may occur from the
deploying passenger airbag.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
2
This vehicle is equipped with a child restraint tether
anchor located on the lower rear of the front passenger
seat. Use this tether anchor to secure only forward
facing child restraints equipped with an upper tether
strap.
WARNING!
Rearward-facing infant restraints must never be se-
cured in the passenger seat of a vehicle with a
passenger airbag. In an accident a passenger airbag
may deploy causing severe injury or death to infants
riding in rearward-facing infant restraints.
Restraining Infants and Small Children with Seat
Delete Feature (Commercial Vehicles Only)
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Use the restraint that is
correct for your child:
•
The rearward-facing infant carrier is for babies weigh-
ing up to about 20 lbs (9 kg), and less than one year
old. THIS TYPE OF SEAT CANNOT BE USED IN A
Commercial Child Restraint Tether Anchor
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH THE REAR SEAT DE-
LETE FEATURE (Commercial Vehicles Only).
•
The forward-facing child seat is for children from
about 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg), and more than one year
old.
•
A “convertible” child seat, one that is designed to be
used for children who are too heavy for a rearward-
facing infant seat, may be used IN THE FORWARD
FACING POSITION ONLY, IT MUST NEVER BE
INSTALLED FACING TO THE REAR IN A VEHICLE
EQUIPPED WITH THE REAR SEAT DELETE FEA-
TURE (Commercial Vehicles Only). When a convert-
ible seat is properly installed facing forward, the
vehicle seat should be adjusted to the rear most
position.
•
Children more than 40 lbs (18 kg) should be secured in
the passenger seat in a child restraint or belt-
positioning booster seat with the seat adjusted to the
rear most position. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats
should ride properly buckled in the passenger seat
with the seat adjusted to the rear most position. Never
allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them
or under their arm.
Tether Installation For Commercial Vehicles With
Rear Seat Delete
To secure the child restraint upper tether strap to the
vehicle, follow the instructions shown:
1. Locate the child restraint tether anchor on the lower
rear of the front passenger seat.
2. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
for proper use of connecting the child restraint to the
extended tether strap.
3. Route the tether strap under the head rest.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
2
NOTE: Ensure that the child restraint tether strap is
centered between the headrest supports underneath the
head rest.
4. Using the hook attached to the child restraint tether
strap, attach the child restraint tether strap to the metal
anchor on the lower rear of the front passenger seat.
5. Following the child seat manufacturer’s instructions,
tighten the child restraint tether strap.
6. Inspect the tether anchor strap for nicks, abrasions,
discoloration, and loose threads. If these, or any other
condition that might effect the performance of the strap is
observed, DO NOT USE. Contact your authorized
DaimlerChrysler dealership for a replacement part.
WARNING!
The vehicle tether anchor is designed to be used with
a child restraint only. It should not be used for any
other purpose. Before use, inspect the tether anchor
strap for nicks, abrasions, discoloration, and loose
threads. If these or any other condition that might
effect the performance of the strap is observed, DO
NOT USE. Personal injury may result. Contact your
authorized DaimlerChrysler dealership for a replace-
ment part.
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine in
your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 mi (500 km). After
the initial 60 mi (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within the
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy-conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in Section 7. NON-
DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST
NEVER BE USED.
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered as a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
SAFETY TIPS
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE INSIDE
THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn
webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt or
retractor condition, replace the belt.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
2
Airbag Light
The light should come on and remain on for four seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned
ON. If the LED is not lit during starting and/or the light
stays on or comes ON while driving, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield.
NOTE: If the defroster is not working or you are unable
to feel air against the windshield in defrost mode, please
see your authorized dealer service center for repairs.
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE
OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect tread and sidewall for cuts or
cracks. Check wheel nuts for tightness, and tires (includ-
ing spare) for proper pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or fuel, power steering fluid, trans-
mission fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)
follow the safety tips below.
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
WARNING!
If you are required to drive with the deck lid / liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
2
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
m Mirrors ..............................100
▫ Manual Rear View Day/Night Mirror —
If Equipped .........................100
▫ Exterior Mirrors ......................102
m Hands-Free Communication (UConnectt)—
If Equipped ...........................104
▫ Operation ...........................106
▫ Phone Call Features ...................113
▫ UConnectt System Features ..............116
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity ............120
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
UConnectt System ....................122
▫ General Information ...................131
m Seats ................................131
▫ Manual Front And Second Row Seat
Adjuster ............................132
▫ Stow ’n Go Seating — If Equipped .........138
▫ Swivel ’n Go Premium Seating —
If Equipped .........................148
m Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped .........155
3
▫ Setting Memory Positions And Linking RKE
Transmitter To Memory .................156
m To Open And Close The Hood .............158
▫ Hood Safety Switch — If Equipped ........159
m Lights ...............................160
▫ Interior Lighting ......................160
▫ Exterior Lights .......................162
m Multifunction Lever .....................166
▫ Turn Signals .........................166
m Tilt Steering Column — If Equipped .........171
m Rear Park Assist System — If Equipped .......171
▫ Rear Park Assist Sensors ................172
m Adjustable Pedals — If Equipped ...........177
m Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped ......179
▫ Activating Electronic Speed Control ........179
m Overhead Consoles .....................182
▫ Front Overhead Console — If Equipped .....182
m Garage Door Opener — If Equipped .........185
▫ Programming HomeLinkt ...............187
▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming .....190
▫ Security ............................191
▫ Troubleshooting Tips ...................191
▫ General Information ...................191
m Power Sunroof — If Equipped .............192
▫ Power Sunroof Operation ...............192
m Electrical Power Outlets — If Equipped .......195
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Power Inverter — If Equipped ............196
▫ Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off .......198
m Sun Screens— If Equipped ................198
m Cup Holders And Convenience Tray Drawer . . .200
▫ Instrument Panel Cup Holders ............200
▫ Interior Bottle Holders ..................201
▫ Smokers Package Kit — If Equipped ........201
m Console Features .......................201
▫ Basic Console ........................201
▫ Premium Console – If Equipped ...........203
m Storage ..............................208
▫ Glove Compartments ..................208
▫ Door Trim Panel Storage ................209
▫ Second Row Floor Storage Bins —
If Equipped .........................210
▫ Removing The Floor Console With Stow ’n Go
Seating — If Equipped .................211
▫ Rear Compartment Storage ..............213
▫ Coat Hooks .........................214
▫ Cargo Area Storage ....................214
m Roof Luggage Rack — If Equipped ..........215
m Umbrella Holder .......................217
m Load-Leveling System — If Equipped ........218
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
3
MIRRORS
Manual Rear View Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear
window. A two point pivot system allows for horizontal
and vertical adjustment of the mirror.
Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the
small control under the mirror to the night position
(toward rear of vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
while set in the day position (toward windshield).
Automatic Rear View Day/Night Mirror — If
Equipped
When using this feature the mirror will automatically
adjust for annoying headlight glare from vehicles behind
you. You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the
button at the base of the mirror. A power indicator light
to the side on/off button will indicate when the dimming
feature is activated.
Manual Rearview Mirror
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the
mirror cover upward. The lights turn on automatically.
Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
3
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Side View Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in a outside convex
mirrors will look smaller and farther away than they
really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors
could cause you to collide with another vehicle or
other object. Use your inside mirror when judging
the size or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex
mirror.
Side View Manual Folding Mirrors
All exterior mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions; full forward, full rearward, and
normal.
Driver’s Auto-Dimming Side View Mirror — If
Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for annoying headlight
glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn this feature
on or off by pressing the button at the base of the
Rearview Mirror.
Power Remote Folding Side View Mirrors — If
Equipped
Press the power fold button to fold in the mirrors. Press
the button again to unfold the mirrors.
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Both mirrors will always move together and will fold
anytime the button is pressed. The ignition switch does
not have to be in the ON position.
Power Remote Side View Mirrors — If Equipped
Use the mirror select switch located on the driver’s door
trim panel, to adjust the view obtained in the outside
mirrors. Press the switch to the Left or Right for mirror
selection. Press the mirror select switch again to guard
against accidentally moving a mirror position. The mirror
selection will also automatically turn off after 30 seconds.
Power Folding Mirror Switch
Power Side Mirror Adjust
1 - Left Mirror 3 - Adjusting Switch
2 - Right Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
3
Select a mirror and press one of the four arrows for the
direction you want the mirror to move.
Driver’s power mirror preselected positions can be con-
trolled by the optional Driver Memory Seat Feature.
Refer to “Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped” in Section
3 of this manual.
HANDS-FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnectT)—
IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code RER, REN and REU radios
contain an integrated Hands-Free Communication
(UConnectt) system. Refer to your “Navigation User’s
Manual” for UConnectt system operating instructions
for these radios.
UConnectt is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-vehicle
communications system. UConnectt allows you to dial a
phone number with your cellular phone using simple
voice commands (e.g., 9Call” { “Mike” {”Work9 or 9Dial”
{ “248-555-12129). Your cellular phone’s audio is trans-
mitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
will automatically mute your radio when using the
UConnectt system.
NOTE: The UConnectt system requires a cellular phone
equipped with the Bluetootht9Hands-Free Profile,9 Ver-
sion 0.96 or higher. See the UConnectt website for
supported phones.
NOTE: For UConnectt customer support, visit the
following websites:
•
www.chrysler.com/uconnect
•
www.dodge.com/uconnect
•
www.jeep.com/uconnect
•
or call 1–877–855–8400
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UConnectt allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphone
for private conversation.
The UConnectt phonebook enables you to store up to 32
names, with four numbers per name. Each language has
a separate 32-name phonebook accessible only in that
language. This system is driven through your Bluetootht
“Hands-Free profile” cellular phone. UConnectt features
Bluetootht technology - the global standard that enables
different electronic devices to connect to each other
without wires or a docking station, so UConnectt works
no matter where you stow your cellular phone (be it your
purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is
turned on and has been paired to the vehicle’s
UConnectt system. The UConnectt system allows up to
seven cellular phones to be linked to the system. Only
one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be used with the
system at a time. The system is available in English,
Spanish, or French languages.
Phone Button
The rearview mirror contains the microphone
for the system (depending on the type of
mirror and radio equipped), and either the
radio or the mirror has the two control buttons
(PHONE Button and VOICE RECOGNITION button)
that will enable you to access the system.
Voice Recognition Button
Actual button location may vary with radio.
The individual buttons are described in the
“Operation” section.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
3
The UConnectt system can be used with any Hands-Free
Profile certified Bluetootht cellular phone. See the
UConnectt website for supported phones. If your cellu-
lar phone supports a different profile (e.g., Headset
Profile) you may not be able to use any UConnectt
features. Refer to your cellular service provider or the
phone manufacturer for details.
The UConnectt system is fully integrated with the vehi-
cle’s audio system. The volume of the UConnectt system
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the UConnectt system such as 9CELL9 or caller ID on
certain radios.
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnectt
system and to navigate through the UConnectt menu
structure. Voice commands are required after most
UConnectt system prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
•
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the beep, which follows the 9Ready9 prompt or another
prompt.
•
For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying 9Setup9 and then
9Phone Pairing,9 the following compound command
can be said: 9Setup Phone Pairing.9
•
For each feature explanation in this section, only the
combined form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
example, you can use the combined form voice com-
mand 9Phonebook New Entry,9 or you can break the
combined form command into two voice commands:
9Phonebook9 and 9New Entry.9 Please remember, the
UConnectt system works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone
sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say 9Help9 following
the beep. The UConnectt system will play all the options
at any prompt if you ask for help.
To activate the UConnectt system from idle, simply press
the PHONE button and follow the audible prompts for
directions. All UConnectt system sessions begin with a
press of the PHONE button on the radio control head.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say 9Cancel9 and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Pair (Link) UConnectt System to a Cellular Phone
To begin using your UConnectt system, you must pair
your compatible Bluetootht enabled cellular phone.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
ence your cellular phone Owner’s Manual. The
UConnectt website may also provide detailed instruc-
tions for pairing.
The following are general phone to UConnectt system
pairing instructions:
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Setup Phone Pairing.9
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
3
•
When prompted, after the beep, say 9Pair a Phone9 and
follow the audible prompts.
•
You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identi-
fication Number (PIN), which you will later need to
enter into your cellular phone. You can enter any
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
after the initial pairing process.
•
For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the UConnectt system a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
•
You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
priority level between 1 and 7, with 1 being the highest
priority. You can pair up to seven cellular phones to
your UConnectt system. However, at any given time,
only one cellular phone can be in use, connected to
your UConnectt system. The priority allows the
UConnectt system to know which cellular phone to
use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the
same time. For example, if priority 3 and priority 5
phones are present in the vehicle, the UConnectt
system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you
make a call. You can select to use a lower priority
cellular phone at any time (refer to 9Advanced Phone
Connectivity9 in this section).
Dial by Saying a Number
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Dial.9
•
The system will prompt you to say the number you
want to call.
•
For example, you can say 9234-567-8901.9 The phone
number that you enter must be of valid length and
combination. Based on the country in which the ve-
hicle was purchased, the UConnectt system limits the
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
user from dialing an invalid combination of numbers.
For example, in the U.S., 234-567-890 is nine digits
long, which is not a valid U.S. phone number - the
closest valid phone number has 10 digits.
•
The UConnectt system will confirm the phone num-
ber and then dial. The number will appear in the
display of certain radios.
Call by Saying a Name
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
“Call.9
•
The system will prompt you to say the name of the
person you want to call.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say 9John Doe,9 where John Doe is a previ-
ously stored name entry in the UConnectt phonebook.
To learn how to store a name in the phonebook, refer
to 9Add Names to Your UConnectt Phonebook,9 in
this section.
•
The UConnectt system will confirm the name and
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
may appear in the display of certain radios.
Add Names to Your UConnectt Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to the phonebook is recom-
mended when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Phonebook New Entry.9
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
3
•
When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the voice recognition and it is
recommended. For example, say 9Robert Smith9 or
9Robert9 instead of 9Bob.9
•
When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
9Home,99Work,99Mobile,9 or 9Pager9). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook
entry, if desired.
•
When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone-
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
The UConnectt system will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language.
Phonebook Download
UConnectt allows the user to download entries from
their phone via Bluetootht. To use this feature, press the
PHONE button and say “Phonebook Download.” The
system prompts, “Ready to accept “V” card entry via
Bluetootht…” The system is now ready to accept phone-
book entries from your phone using the Bluetootht
Object Exchange Profile (OBEX). Please see your phone
Owner’s Manual for specific instructions on how to send
these entries from your phone.
NOTE:
•
The phone handset must support Bluetootht OBEX
transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature.
•
Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they
are already connected to any system via Bluetootht,
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
and you may see a message on the phone display that
the Bluetootht link is busy. In this case, the user must
first disconnect or drop the Bluetootht connection to
the UConnectt system, and then send the address
book entry via Bluetootht. Please see your phone
Owner’s Manual for specific instructions on how to
drop the Bluetootht connection.
•
If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters, it
will only use the first 24 characters.
Edit Entries in the UConnectt Phonebook
NOTE: Editing names in the phonebook is recom-
mended when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Phonebook Edit.9
•
You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
•
Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
mobile, or pager) that you wish to edit.
•
When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
to the main menu.
9Phonebook Edit9 can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mobile and a home number, but you can add ”John
Doe’s” work number later using the 9Phonebook Edit9
feature.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
3
Delete Entries in the UConnectt Phonebook
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Phonebook Delete.9
•
After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say 9List
Names9 to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the “Voice Recognition” button
while the UConnectt system is playing the desired
entry and say 9Delete.9
•
After you enter the name, the UConnectt system will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
work, mobile, pager, or all. Say the designation you
wish to delete.
•
Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted.
Delete All Entries in the UConnectt Phonebook
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Phonebook Erase All.9
•
The UConnectt system will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
•
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
•
Note that only the phonebook in the current language
is deleted.
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
List All Names in the UConnectt Phonebook
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Phonebook List Names.9
•
The UConnectt system will play the names of all the
phonebook entries.
•
To call one of the names in the list, press the “Voice
Recognition” button during the playing of the desired
name, and say 9Call.9
NOTE: The user can also exercise 9Edit9 or 9Delete9
operations at this point.
•
The UConnectt system will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
•
The selected number will be dialed.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
UConnectt system if the feature(s) are available on your
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the UConnectt system. Check with
your cellular service provider for the features that you
have.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
Currently in Progress
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the
UConnectt system will interrupt the vehicle audio sys-
tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
call. Press the PHONE button to accept the call. To reject
the call, press and hold the PHONE button until you hear
a single beep, indicating that the incoming call was
rejected.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
3
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Currently in Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell
phone. Press the PHONE button to place the current call
on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The UConnectt system compatible phones in
the market today do not support rejecting an incoming
call when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user
can only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making a Second Call While Current Call in
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
press the “Voice Recognition” button and say 9Dial9 or
9Call9 followed by the phone number or phonebook entry
you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the
second call is in progress. To go back to the first call, refer
to 9Toggling Between Calls9 in this section. To combine
two calls, refer to 9Conference Call9 in this section.
Place/Retrieve a Call From Hold
To put a call on hold, press the PHONE button until you
hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold.
To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
PHONE button until you hear a single beep.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep,
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at one
time.
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the PHONE button until you hear
a double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the “Voice Recogni-
tion” button while a call is in progress, and make a
second phone call, as described under 9Making a Second
Call While Current Call in Progress.9 After the second call
has established, press and hold the PHONE button until
you hear a double beep, indicating that the two calls have
been joined into one conference call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the PHONE
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
If the active call is terminated by the far end, a call on
hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep.
Redial
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Redial.9
•
The UConnectt system will call the last number that
was dialed from your cellular phone.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
UConnectt system.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
UConnectt system after the vehicle ignition key has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail-
able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
•
After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the UConnectt system either until the call
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
cessation of the call on the UConnectt system and
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
3
•
After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the UConnectt system for a certain dura-
tion, after which the call is automatically transferred
from the UConnectt system to the mobile phone.
•
An active call is automatically transferred to the
mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF.
UConnectT System Features
Language Selection
To change the language that the UConnectt system is
using:
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
English, Espanol, or Francais.
•
Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
language selection.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every UConnectt language change opera-
tion, only the language-specific 32-name phonebook is
usable. The paired phone name is not language-specific
and usable across all languages.
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
•
Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
If the phone is not reachable and the UConnectt system
is operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Emergency9 and the UConnectt system will instruct
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num-
ber. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.
NOTE: The emergency number dialed is based on the
country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S.
and Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
not be applicable with the available cellular service and
area.
The UConnectt system does slightly lower your chances
of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell
phone directly.
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the
UConnectt system to allow use of this vehicle feature in
emergency situations, when the cell phone has network
coverage and stays paired to the UConnectt system.
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance:
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Towing Assistance.9
NOTE: The Towing Assistance number dialed is based
on the country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528-
2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454
for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico
City in Mexico).
Please refer to the 24-Hour “Towing Assistance” cover-
age details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on
the 24–Hour Towing Assistance Card.
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to 9Working with Automated
Systems.9 Paging works properly except for pagers of
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
3
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
work properly with the UConnectt system.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to 9Working
with Automated Systems.9
Working with Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your UConnectt system to access a voice
mail system or an automated service, such as a paging
service or automated customer service line. Some ser-
vices require immediate response selection. In some
instances, that may be too quick for use of the UConnectt
system.
When calling a number with your UConnectt system
that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone
sequence on your cellular phone keypad, you can press
the “Voice Recognition” button and say the sequence you
wish to enter, followed by the word 9Send.9 For example,
if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7
4 6 #), you can press the “Voice Recognition” button and
say, 93746#Send.9 Saying a number, or sequence of
numbers, followed by 9Send,9 is also to be used for
navigating through an automated customer service cen-
ter menu structure, and to leave a number on a pager.
You can also send stored UConnectt phonebook entries
as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
call and then press the “Voice Recognition” button and
say, “Send.” The system will prompt you to enter the
name or number and say the name of the phonebook
entry you wish to send. The UConnectt system will then
send the corresponding phone number associated with
the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•
You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone
network configurations; this is normal.
•
Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
use of this feature.
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
The “Voice Recognition” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
recognition command immediately. For example, if a
prompt is asking 9Would you like to pair a phone, clear
a{,9 you could press the “Voice Recognition” button and
say, 9Pair a Phone9 to select that option without having to
listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the UConnectt sys-
tem will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Setup Confirmations.9 The UConnectt system will
play the current confirmation prompt status and you
will be given the choice to change it.
Phone and Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your cell phone, the UConnectt system will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using UConnectt. The status is given for roaming, net-
work signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
keypad and still use the UConnectt system (while dial-
ing via the cell phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
3
dialing a number with your paired Bluetootht cellular
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The UConnectt system will work the same
as if you dial the number using voice recognition.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the UConnectt system to play it on the
vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
situation, after successfully dialing a number the user
may feel that the call did not go through even though the
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
hear the audio.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute Off)
When you mute the UConnectt system, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the UConnectt system:
•
Press the “Voice Recognition” button.
•
Following the beep, say 9Mute.9
In order to un-mute the UConnectt system:
•
Press the “Voice Recognition” button.
•
Following the beep, say 9Mute off.9
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
The UConnectt system allows ongoing calls to be trans-
ferred from your cellular phone to the UConnectt system
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your UConnectt paired cellular phone to the
UConnectt system or vice versa, press the “Voice Recog-
nition” button and say 9Transfer Call.9
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
UConnectt System and Cellular Phone
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively 9connected9
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetootht
connection between a UConnectt paired cellular phone
and the UConnectt system, follow the instructions de-
scribed in your cellular phone User’s Manual.
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
•
When prompted, say 9List Phones.9
•
The UConnectt system will play the phone names of
all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to
the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired
phone being announced, press the “Voice Recogni-
tion” button and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the
next two sections for an alternate way to “select” or
“delete” a paired phone.
Select Another Cellular Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone paired with the UConnectt system.
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Setup Select Phone9 and follow the prompts.
•
You can also press the “Voice Recognition” button at
any time while the list is being played, and then
choose the phone that you wish to select.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
3
•
The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
UConnectt system will return to using the highest
priority phone present in or near (approximately
within 30 ft [9 m]) the vehicle.
Delete UConnectt Paired Cellular Phones
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Setup Phone Pairing.9
•
At the next prompt, say 9Delete9 and follow the
prompts.
•
You can also press the “Voice Recognition” button at
any time while the list is being played, and then
choose the phone you wish to delete.
Things You Should Know About Your UConnectT
System
UConnectt Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
PHONE button and say “UConnectt Tutorial.”
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers, the UConnectt
system Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
training mode, follow one of the two following proce-
dures:
From outside the UConnectt mode (e.g., from radio
mode):
•
Press and hold the “Voice Recognition” button for five
seconds until the session begins, or,
•
Press the “Voice Recognition” button and say the
9Setup, Voice Training9 command.
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the
UConnectt system. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked
with the engine running, all windows closed, and the
blower fan switched OFF.
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default
settings, enter the Voice Training session via the above
procedure and follow the prompts.
Voice Recognition (VR)
•
For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
provide at least
1
⁄
2
in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
•
Always wait for the beep before speaking.
•
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
•
Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a voice recognition period.
•
Performance is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
•
fully closed windows,
•
dry weather condition.
•
Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-
cents, the system may not always work for some.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
3
•
When navigating through an automated system such
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say 9Send.9
•
Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
not in motion is recommended.
•
It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the UConnectt phonebook.
•
The UConnectt phonebook nametag recognition rate
is optimized for the person who stored the name in the
phonebook.
•
You can say 9O9 (letter 9O9) for 909 (zero). 98009 must be
spoken 9eight-zero-zero.9
•
Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
•
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Far End Audio Performance
•
Audio quality is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
•
fully closed windows,
•
dry weather conditions, and
•
operation from the driver’s seat.
•
Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the UConnectt system.
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
•
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Bluetootht Communication Link
Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to
the UConnectt system. When this happens, the connec-
tion can generally be re-established by switching the
phone off/on. Your cell phone is recommended to remain
in Bluetootht ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON
or ACC position, or after a language change, you must
wait at least five seconds prior to using the system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
3
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
3
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
all
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
home
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
3
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
pager
pair a phone
phone pairing pairing
phonebook phone book
previous
record again
redial
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
return to main menu return or main menu
select phone select
send
set up phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
UConnectt Tutorial
try again
voice training
work
yes
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
SEATS
Seats are a primary part of the Occupant Restraint
(protection) System of the vehicle. They need to be used
properly for safe operation of the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
DO NOT allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
3
Manual Front And Second Row Seat Adjuster
The adjusting bar is located under the front of the seat.
Pull the bar up and move the seat to the desired position.
Release the bar to lock the seat into position.
Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the
seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Manual Seat Adjuster
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
8–Way Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped
The driver’s power seat switches are located on the
outboard side of the seat. The front switch controls
up/down, forward/rearward, and tilt adjustment. The
rear switch controls the seatback recline adjustment.
CAUTION!
DO NOT place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Driver Power Seat Switch
1 - Bottom Control 2 - Seatback Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
3
Adjustable Head Restraints
Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in
the event of impact from the rear. Pull up or push down
on the head restraint cushion so that the upper edge is as
high as practical. To raise the head restraint, pull up on
the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, depress
the release tab located at the base of the head restraint
and push down on the head restraint.
Adjusting The Head Restraint Cushion
1 - Removal Release 2 - Lowering Release
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Heated Seats — If Equipped
This feature heats the front driver and
passenger seats. The controls for front
heated seats are located on the center
instrument panel area. The switch in-
dicator lights will show when the
HIGH or LOW heat is ON. Press the
switch once to choose HIGH (two
lights), press it a second time to choose LOW (one light),
press it a third time for No Heat (no lights).
Second row heated seat switches are located in the
sliding side door handle trim panels and function the
same as front switches.
Sliding Door Controls
1 - Heated Seat Switch 4 - Door Handle
2 - Power Window Switch 5 - Power Sliding Door Switch
3 - Manual Lock
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
3
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. DO NOT place anything on the seat
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat.
Manual Reclining Seats — If Equipped
The recliner mechanism control is on the outboard side of
the seat. To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever,
then push back to the desired position and release the
lever. Lean forward and lift the lever to return the
seatback to its normal position. Using body pressure, lean
forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback
has latched.
Manual Reclining Seat Control
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
DO NOT ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or fatally injured. Use the recliner only
when the vehicle is parked.
Manual Lumbar Adjust Lever — If Equipped
The lumbar adjustment handle is located on the outboard
side of the seat. To increase the support, rotate the handle
down. To decrease the support, rotate the handle up-
wards.
Manual Lumbar Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
3
Stow ’n Go Seating — If Equipped
On vehicles equipped with Stow ’n Go seating, the
second and third row seats may be folded into the floor
for convenient storage.
To Fold Second Row Seats
1. Move the front seat fully forward.
2. Lower the head restraints and raise the armrests on the
second row seat.
3. Slide the storage bin locking mechanism to the 9un-
locked9 position and then pull up on the storage bin latch
to open the cover.
1 - Bin Latch 3 - Seatback Release
2 - Storage Pocket
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Pull up on the seatback recliner lever located on the
outboard side of the seat and fold the seatback down. To
assure the seatback is latched in the folded position,
additional downward pressure on the seatback may be
required when folding.
Storage Bin Cover Lock Release
Second Row Seatback Release Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
3
5. Pull rearward on the release strap located at the rear of
the seat and tumble the seat forward into the storage bin.
6. Close the storage bin cover and slide the storage bin
locking mechanism to the locked position.
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must be locked and flat to
avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,
which have minimal clearance to the cover.
WARNING!
In an accident, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
•
DO NOT drive the vehicle with the storage bin
covers open.
•
Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched
while the vehicle is in motion.
•
DO NOT use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
Second Row Seat Release Strap
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Unfold Second Row Seats
1. Slide the storage bin locking mechanism to the 9un-
locked9 position and then pull up on the storage bin latch
to open the cover.
2. Pull up on the handle to lift the seat out of the storage
bin and push the seat rearward to latch the seat anchors.
Second Row Seat Release Handle
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
3
3. Pull up on the seatback recliner lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, to return the seatback to its full
upright position.
4. Close the storage bin cover and adjust the head
restraint to the desired position.
Second Row Bench Seat — If Equipped
While the bench seat does not stow in the floor, it is
removable for added cargo space. Rollers integrated into
the seat frame ease removal through the rear. Floor
storage compartments are still available with the bench
seat.
Third Row Power Seat — If Equipped
The third row power seat offers the following features:
•
The seatbacks can be folded forward for additional
cargo space if needed
•
Head restraints can be stowed with the seat
•
Tailgate mode flips the seat rearward to face out the
tailgate.
Second Row Seatback Release Lever
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The power recline feature, located on the side of the seat
cushion, adjusts the seatback angle forward/rearward
for occupant comfort
Remote Third Row Power Seat Switch— If
Equipped
A One-Touch Third Row Power Folding Seat switch is
located in the left rear trim panel as part of a switch-bank.
Third Row Power Seat Switch
One Touch Folding Seat Third Row
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
3
The rear switch bank allows multiple power folding and
unfolding positions for the third row seats.
Left and right third row seats can be folded individually
or together. The One Touch Third Row Power Folding
Seat adjusts to the following positions using the switch
bank located on the left rear trim panel:
Rear Panel Power Switch Bank
1 — Open to Normal 4 — Fold Flat
2 — Stow 5 — Right/Left or Both Seats
3 — Tailgate
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Third Row Power Seat system includes
obstacle detection for safe operation. When the system
detects an obstacle, the motors will stop and reverse the
motion for a brief period. Should this occur, remove the
obstacle and repress the button again, for the desired
position.
To Fold Third Row Seats Manually — If Equipped
1. Lower the head restraint to its full down position.
2. Pull release strap marked “1” located on the rear of the
seat to lower the seatback.
3. Pull release strap marked “2” to release the anchors.
4. Pull release strap marked “3” and tumble the seat
rearward into the storage bin.
Folding Third Row Seat Strap
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
3
To Unfold Third Row Seats
1. Pull up on the assist strap to lift the seat out of the
storage bin and push the seat forward until the anchors
latch.
2. Pull release strap marked “1” to unlock the recliner.
3. Pulling strap “3” releases the seatback to return to its
full upright position.
4. Adjust the head restraint to the desired position.
WARNING!
In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could be
injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor
attachments. Always be sure the seats are fully
latched.
Tailgate Mode
1. Pull release strap “2”, then pull release strap “3” to
rotate the entire seat rearward.
2. To restore the seat to its upright position, lift up on the
seatback and push forward until the anchors latch.
Tailgate Positioning Release Straps 2 and 3
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death, NEVER operate the
vehicle with occupants in the third row seat while in
the tailgate mode.
Easy Access Seating
The second row Stow ’n Go seats can be tilted forward for
easy access to the third row seat or rear cargo area.
To tilt the seat, pull forward on the release strap located
on the front of the seat between the seatback and seat
cushion and tilt the seat fully forward.
To return the seat to its upright position, push rearward
on the seatback until it latches. Always ensure that it is
fully latched.
WARNING!
In the event of a collision you could be injured if the
seat is not fully latched.
Tilting Second Row Stow ’n Go Seat
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
3
Swivel ’n Go Premium Seating — If Equipped
Premium second row Swivel ’n Go Seating features
include:
•
A table that installs between the second and third row
seats. The table disassembles and stows in the hidden
second row floor storage bin
•
Seats rotate to face forward or rearward
•
Seat belts are integrated into the swivel seats
•
Dual folding armrests
•
A side storage pocket that will accommodate a phone
or hand-held game
•
Seats are removable
Swivel ’n Go Seating Features
1 - Seat Release 4 - Seatback Release
2 - Fore-Aft Adjustment 5 - Moveable Armrest
3 - Swivel Release
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To swivel the seat: Pull the lower handle on the outboard
side of the seat and push the side of the seatback to begin
rotation. Once the seat begins to rotate, the handle may
be released. The seat locks in position once reaching the
forward or rearward positions only.
Seatbacks fold forward on an angle, not flat. This allows
the seats to swivel when the seatbacks are folded.
WARNING!
Failure to comply with the following conditions
could result in serious injury or even death.
•
NEVER place any child seat or infant carrier in the
Swivel ’n Go seat while it is in the rearward facing
position.
•
The swivel seat should be locked in the forward
position when using any child seat or infant
carriers, with the vehicle in motion.
•
Occupants riding in Swivel ’n Go seating, must be
wearing their seat belt and the seat must be locked
in either the forward or rearward position.
•
Make sure the Swivel ’n Go seat is in a locked
position with the handle down. Test the seat after
it is locked to see that it doesn’t swivel.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
3
Removing Swivel ’n Go Premium Seating — If
Equipped
1. Remove any obstructions from the floor behind the
seat, and stow the Third Row Seat.
2. Pull up on the release bar located at the bottom front
edge of the swivel seat.
3. From behind the seat, lift up on the rear of the seat
cushion while pulling the seat in a rearward direction.
4. Remove the seat from vehicle through the liftgate.
Rollers are part of the seat frame and will ease the
removal process.
5. Lower the release handle located at the bottom front
edge of the seat.
Each seat weighs about 90 lbs. (81 kg).
NOTE: Electrical contacts for the available heated seats
automatically disengage or engage as the seat is removed
or installed. The contacts slide past each other as the seat
is rolled to and from the strikers.
When reinstalling the seat, make certain to lower the
release handle to ensure the seat is latched securely.
WARNING!
In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could be
injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor
attachments. Always be sure the seats are fully
latched.
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Swivel ’n Go Premium Seating Table — If
Equipped
The Swivel ’n Go Seating Table consists of an easily
assembled post and top.
The table and leg are stored beneath the floor when not in
use. To install the table follow these steps:
1. Swivel the second row seats so they are facing the rear.
Second Row Seating and Table
Second Row Seating and Table
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
3
2. Open the floor storage cover in front of the second row
seats.
3. Remove the pole and table top by loosening the hook
and loop straps.
4. Insert pole into base by aligning the lock button into
notch of the base.
Table and Leg Storage Installing Table Leg Into Base
1 - Table Base 2 - Lock/Release Button
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
5. Twist the pole in a clockwise rotation until it stops.
Note: You will hear an audible “click” when the lock
button engages the base.
6. Place the table top over the installed pole aligning
with the mating feature of the underside of the table top.
Apply pressure on the table top and press downward.
Note: You will hear an audible “click” when the table
latch engages the pole.
WARNING!
Failure to comply with the following conditions
could result in serious injury or even death.
•
DO NOT install the table while vehicle is in
motion
•
NEVER drive the vehicle with only the pole in-
stalled
•
DO NOT place heavy or sharp objects on table.
•
DO NOT place liquid drinks on the table, use
available cup holders.
•
Second Row seats must be locked in the rearward
facing position before installing the table.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
3
To separate the table top from the pole, follow these
steps:
1. Locate the release latch on the underside of the table
top.
2. Pull horizontally on the latch to activate the release
from the pole.
3. While pulling on the latch, pull upward to remove the
table top from the pole.
NOTE: The table top should be removed from the leg
prior to removing the leg from its mounting base.
4. Locate the release button on the pole. Press the release
button firmly to activate the release from the base.
5. While pressing the release button, twist the pole in a
counterclockwise rotation until it stops. Pull upward to
remove the pole from the base.
6. Place the pole on the underside of the table top and
secure with the hook and loop straps.
7. Once the pole and table top are secured, you may
place them in the floor storage bin in front of the second
row seats.
NOTE: Always store the table and pole in the floor
storage bin when not in use.
Table Top Release
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks
Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag
handles are built into the seatbacks of all rear seats and
some front seats. The floor supports the partial weight of
the bagged goods.
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
Once programmed, the Memory Buttons 1 and 2 on the
driver’s door panel can be used to recall the driver’s seat,
driver’s outside mirror, adjustable brake and accelerator
pedals, and radio station preset settings. Your Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters can also be pro-
grammed to recall the same positions when the UN-
LOCK button is pressed.
Your vehicle may have been delivered with two Remote
Keyless Entry transmitters. One or both transmitters can
be linked to either Memory Position. The memory system
can accommodate up to four transmitters, each one
linked to either of the two memory positions.
Driver Memory Seat Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
3
Setting Memory Positions And Linking RKE
Transmitter To Memory
NOTE: Each time the SET(S) button and a numbered
button (1 or 2) are pressed, you erase the memory settings
for that button and store a new one.
1. Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to
the ON position.
2. Press the driver door Memory Buttons number 1 if
you are setting the memory for driver 1, or button
number 2 if you are setting the memory for driver 2. The
system will recall any stored settings. Wait for the system
to complete the memory recall before continuing to step
3.
3. Adjust the driver’s seat, recliner, and driver’s side-
view mirror to the desired positions.
4. Adjust the brake and accelerator pedals to the desired
positions.
5. Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets (up
to 10 AM and 10 FM stations can be set).
6. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
remove the key.
7. Press and release the SET(S) button located on the
driver’s door. A chime will sound signaling that you are
in the memory set mode.
8. Within five seconds, press and release Memory Button
1 or 2 on the driver’s door. A chime will sound signaling
to you that the driver memory has been set. The next step
must be performed within five seconds if you desire to
also use a Remote Keyless Entry transmitter to recall
memory positions.
9. Press and release the LOCK button on one of the
transmitters. Achime will sound signaling to you that the
transmitter has been successfully linked to memory.
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
10. Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to
the ON position.
11. Select 9Remote Linked to Memory9 in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and enter 9Yes9 or
select 9No9 from the EVIC and enter 9Yes9. Refer to the
Customer Programmable features in the Electronic Ve-
hicle Information Center (EVIC) section for more infor-
mation.
12. Repeat the above steps to set the next Memory
Position using the other numbered Memory Button or to
link another Remote Keyless Entry transmitter to
memory.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
in PARK, a message will be displayed in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
To recall the memory settings for driver one, press
Memory Button 1 on the driver’s door or the UNLOCK
button on the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter linked to
Memory Position 1.
To recall the memory setting for driver two, press
Memory Button 2 on the driver’s door or the UNLOCK
button on the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter linked to
Memory Position 2.
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the memory
buttons on the driver’s door during a recall (S, 1, or 2).
When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat, driver’s
mirror, and the pedals stop moving. A delay of one
second will occur before another recall can be selected.
To Disable A RKE Transmitter Linked to Memory
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
remove the key.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
3
2. Press and release Memory Button 1. The system will
recall any memory settings stored in position 1. Wait for
the system to complete the memory recall before continu-
ing to step 3.
3. Press and release the memory SET(S) button located
on the driver’s door. A chime will sound signaling that
you are in the memory set mode.
4. Within five seconds, press and release Memory Button
1 on the driver’s door. A chime will sound signaling to
you that the driver memory has been set.
5. Within five seconds, press and release the UNLOCK
button on the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter. A chime
will sound signaling to you that the transmitter link has
been successfully disabled.
To disable another transmitter linked to either Memory
Position, repeat steps 1 to 5 for each transmitter.
NOTE: Once programmed, all transmitters linked to
memory can be easily enabled or disabled at one time.
Refer to the Remote Linked to Memory 9Customer Pro-
grammable Features9 in the Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion Center (EVIC) for more information.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the hood release lever located on the instrument
panel, below the steering column.
2. Move to the front of the vehicle and look inside the
center of the hood opening. Locate, then push the safety
catch lever to the right while raising the hood at the same
time.
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open
position.
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 12
inches (30 cm) and then drop it. This should secure both
latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully
closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up when
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
You could have a collision. Be sure all hood latches
are fully latched before driving.
Hood Safety Switch — If Equipped
If the vehicle is equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), and the hood is not latched,
the EVIC will display “Hood Ajar” in the instrument
cluster EVIC display window.
Hood Safety Catch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
3
If the vehicle is equipped with the Compass Mini-Trip
Computer (CMTC) and the hood is not latched, a “hood”
will be displayed in the PRNDL/Odometer window of
the instrument cluster.
LIGHTS
All of the lights, except the hazard warning lights,
headlamp high beams and flash to pass, are controlled by
switches to the left of the steering column on the instru-
ment panel.
Interior Lighting
Interior lights are turned on when a door or liftgate is
opened, the keyless entry transmitter is activated, or
when the dimmer control is moved to the extreme top.
Headlight Switch Assembly
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The interior lights will automatically turn off in about 10
minutes for the first activation and 90 seconds every
activation thereafter until the engine is started, if one of
the following occur:
•
A door, sliding door or the liftgate is left open
•
Any overhead reading light is left on
•
If the dimmer control is in the extreme top position
NOTE: The key must be out of the ignition switch or the
ignition switch must be in the OFF position for this
feature to operate.
Dome Light Positions
Rotate the dimmer control completely
upward to the second detent (extreme
top position) to turn on the interior
lights, except the front reading/
courtesy lights. The interior lights will
remain on when the dimmer control is
in this position.
Interior Lighting Defeat (Off)
Rotate the dimmer control to the off
position (extreme bottom). The inte-
rior lights will remain off when the
doors or liftgate are open.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
3
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the dimmer control to the first
detent. This feature brightens the
odometer, radio and overhead dis-
plays when the park lights or head-
lights are on.
Dimmer Control
With the park lights or headlights on,
rotating the dimmer control for the
interior lights on the instrument panel
upward will increase the brightness of
the instrument panel lights.
HALO Lights — If Equipped
Halo Lights are strategically-placed, soft lighting that
helps to illuminate specific areas to aid the occupants in
locating specific features while driving at night.
To activate the Halo lights, push in on the Halo
switch located below the dimmer control.
Pressing the switch in a second time, will turn
the Halo lights off.
Exterior Lights
Parking Lights
Turn the headlight switch knob to the first detent
to turn the park lights on. This also turns on all
instrument panel lighting.
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Daytime Running Lights (Canada/Fleet Vehicles
Only)
The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the
engine is started and the transmission is in any gear
except PARK. This provides a constant lights on condi-
tion until the ignition is turned OFF. The lights illuminate
at less than 50% of normal intensity. If the parking brake
is applied the Daytime Running Lights (DRL) will turn
off.Also, if a turn signal is activated, the DRL lamp on the
same side of the vehicle will turn off for the duration of
the turn signal activation. Once the turn signal is no
longer active, the DRL lamp will illuminate.
Headlights
Turn the headlight switch knob to the 2nd
detent to turn the headlights and park lights
on. This also turns on all instrument panel
lighting.
To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights,
rotate the dimmer control up or down.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns your headlights on or off
based on ambient light levels. To turn the system on, turn
the headlight switch to the extreme counterclockwise
position aligning the indicator with the “A” on the
headlight switch. When the system is on, the Headlight
Time Delay feature is also on. This means your headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the
ignition switch OFF. To turn the Automatic System off,
turn the headlight switch clockwise to the “O” off
position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
3
NOTE: The engine must be running before the head-
lights will come on in the Automatic mode.
Headlights On with Wipers — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights it
also has this customer programmable feature. When your
headlights are in the automatic mode, and the engine is
running, the headlights will automatically turn on when
the wiper system is on.
Headlight Delay — If Equipped
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds after exiting your vehicle.
To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switch
while the headlights are still on. Then turn off the
headlights within 45 seconds. The 90 second delay inter-
val begins when headlight switch is turned off. If the
headlights or park lights are turned back on or the
ignition switch is turned on, the delay will be cancelled.
The driver can choose, when exiting the vehicle, to have
the headlights remain on for 30, 60, or 90 seconds, or not
remain on. To change the timer setting see your autho-
rized Dealer.
Automatic Headlights
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the headlights are turned off before the ignition, they
will turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE: The headlights must be turned off within 45
seconds of turning the ignition OFF to activate this
feature.
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the park
lights or the low beam headlights and push in the
headlight switch control knob. Pressing the head-
light switch control knob in a second time, will turn the
front fog lights off.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or the park lights are left on, or if the
dimmer control is in the extreme top position after the
ignition switch is turned OFF, a chime will sound when
the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Light Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
3
Battery Protection
This feature provides battery protection to avoid wearing
down the battery if the headlights, park lights, or front
fog lights are left on for extended periods of time when
the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. After eight
minutes of the ignition switch being in the LOCK posi-
tion and the headlight switch in any position other than
OFF or AUTO, the lights will turn off automatically until
the next cycle of the ignition switch or headlight switch.
The battery protection feature will be disabled if the
ignition switch is turned to any other position other than
LOCK during the three minute delay.
MULTIFUNCTION LEVER
The multifunction control lever is located on the left side
of the steering column.
The Multifunction Lever assembly controls:
•
Turn Signals
•
Headlight Low and High Beams
•
Flash-to-Pass (Optical Horn)
•
Front and Rear Wiper And Washer Functions
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down to signal a
right-hand or left-hand turn.
The arrow on either side of the instrument cluster flashes
to indicate the direction of the turn, and proper operation
of the front and rear turn signal lights.
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check for a
defective outside turn signal light bulb. If one of the
indicators fails to light when the lever is moved, it would
suggest that the indicator light is defective.
You may manually signal a lane change by moving the
lever partially up or down.
Turn Signal Auto-Mode
Tap the multifunction control lever once and the turn
signal (left or right) will flash three times, and automati-
cally turn off.
Turn Signal Warning
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has
traveled at over 18 mph (29 km/h) for about 1 mi (1.6
km) with the turn signals on, a chime will sound to alert
the driver.
Turn Signal Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
3
Windshield Wiper and Washer Functions
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch within
the multifunction lever. Rotate the end of the lever to
select the desired wiper speed.
NOTE: Always remove any buildup of snow that pre-
vents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off
and the blades cannot return to the off position, damage
to the wiper motor may occur.
Multifunction Lever Features
1 - Front Mist/Washer 3 - Rear Wiper/Washer
2 - Wiper Speeds 4 - Low/High Beam and Flash
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
1. Multifunction Lever — Mist, Front Wiper and
Washer
Press the end of the multifunction lever inward to the
first detent and release to clear the windshield. Pressing
the multifunction lever inward to the second detent will
cause the washers to spray for a maximum of 10 seconds,
or until the lever is released, and the wipers will cycle
three times.
NOTE: If the multifunction lever is depressed while in
the delay range, the wipers will operate for several
seconds after the lever is released, and then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected.
If the multifunction lever is depressed while in the off
position, the wipers will operate for approximately two
wipe cycles and automatically turn off.
2. Intermittent, Low and High Speed Wipers
Use the intermittent wipers when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause be-
tween cycles, desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunc-
tion lever to the first detent position, then turn the end of
the lever to select the desired delay interval. The delay
can be regulated from a maximum of about 20 seconds
between cycles, to a cycle every 2 seconds. The time delay
will be doubled if the vehicle speed is less than 10 mph
(16 km/h).
Low Speed is achieved by rotating the multifunction
lever past the intermittent settings, to the first detent.
High Speed is achieved by rotating the multifunction
lever past the intermittent settings, to the second detent.
3. Rotary Ring — Rear Wiper and Washer
Rotating the rotary ring to the first detent activates the
rear intermittent wipers. To activate the washers, rotate
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
3
the rotary ring fully forward and the washers will spray
until the ring is released, and then resume the intermit-
tent interval.
NOTE: Rear window wipers function in the intermittent
wiper speed only.
4. Headlight Low/High Beam Select Switch and
Flash-to-Pass
Headlight Low/High Beam Select Switch When the
headlights are turned on, pushing the lever assembly
toward the instrument panel will switch from low beams
to high beams. Pulling back to the neutral position
returns to low beam headlights.
Flash-to-Pass (Optical Horn) You can signal another
vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the mul-
tifunction lever toward you. This will cause the head-
lights to turn on at high beam and remain on until the
lever is released.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to an accident. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with defroster before and during wind-
shield washer use.
Headlights On When Wipers Are On — If
Equipped
Headlights on when windshield wipers are on may be
found on vehicles equipped with automatic headlight
system. Refer to the Electronic Vehicle Information Cen-
ter (EVIC) in Section 4 under “PERSONAL SETTINGS
(CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES)” for more
information.
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TILT STEERING COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED
To tilt the column, pull the small lever downward
(located on the steering column and below the steering
wheel) to the open position. You may then position the
steering wheel up or down, as desired. Pull the small
lever upward to the closed position to lock the steering
wheel firmly in place.
WARNING!
Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is
moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering col-
umn, you could lose control of the vehicle and have
an accident. Adjust the column only while the ve-
hicle is stopped. Be sure it is locked before driving.
REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Rear Park Assist System provides visual and audible
indications of the distance between the rear fascia and the
detected obstacle when backing up. When backing up the
driver should also use the inside rearview and outside
mirrors.
Tilt Steering Column Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
3
The Rear Park Assist System will remember the last
system state (enabled or disabled) from the last ignition
cycle when the ignition is changed to the RUN/ON
position.
The Rear Park Assist System can be active only when the
transaxle gear selector lever is in REVERSE. When in
REVERSE, the system scans for objects behind the vehicle
using four sensors located in the rear bumper.
NOTE: The system will be active until the vehicle speed
is increased to approximately 11 mph (18 km/h) or
above. The system will be active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 10
mph (16 km/h).
Rear Park Assist Sensors
The four Rear Park Assist Sensors, located in the rear
fascia, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within
the sensors’ field of view. The monitored area seems oval
in shape. The sensors can detect obstacles from approxi-
mately 11.8 in (30 cm) up to 78.7 in (200 cm) from the rear
fascia in the horizontal direction, depending on the
location and orientation of the obstacle and the type of
obstacle.
Rear Park Assist Warning Display
The Rear Park Assist Warning Display, located in the
headliner near the liftgate glass, provides both visual and
audible warnings to indicate the distance between the
rear fascia and the detected obstacle.
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the ignition switch is turned to the RUN/ON
position, the warning display will turn on all of its LEDs
for about one second. Each side of the warning display
has six yellow and two red LED lights, one set to warn of
obstacles behind the left rear of the vehicle and the other
set to warn of obstacles behind the right rear of the
vehicle. The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the red
LED is illuminated.
The driver can view the LEDs either through the rear-
view mirror or by looking directly at the display above
the rear window.
The system dimly illuminates the two outer most yellow
LEDs when it is on and detects no obstacles. The follow-
ing chart shows the warning display operation when the
system is detecting an obstacle.
Rear Park Assist LED Lights
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
3
PARK ASSIST WARNING DISPLAY DISTANCES
DISPLAY LED OBSTACLE DISTANCE FROM:
REAR CENTER
AUDIBLE SIGNAL
REAR CORNERS REAR CENTER
1st LED 78.7 in (200 cm) Yellow Yes, Half Second
2nd LED 51.1 in (130 cm) Yellow None
3rd LED 45.2 in (115 cm) Yellow None
4th LED 31.5 in (80 cm) 39.3 in (100 cm) Yellow None
5th LED 25.5 in (65 cm) 33.5 in (85 cm) Yellow None
6th LED 20 in (50 cm) 27.6 in (70 cm) Yellow None
7th LED 16 in (40 cm) 19.7 in (50 cm) Red at 12 in (30 cm)
Intermittent
8th LED 6 in (15 cm) 11.81 in (30 cm) Red at 8 in (20 cm)
Continuous
NOTE: The Rear Park Assist System will MUTE the radio, if on, when the audible warning is activated.
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the Rear Park Assist System. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible
for the safety of your surroundings and must con-
tinue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do
so can result in serious injury or death.
Before using the Rear Park Assist System, it is
strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch
ball assembly be disconnected from the vehicle when
the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so
can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the warning dis-
play turns the red LEDs on. Also, the sensors could
detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, de-
pending on its size and shape, giving a false indica-
tion that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
•
To avoid vehicle damage the Rear Park Assist
System should only be used as a parking aid and
is unable to recognize every obstacle, including
small objects. Parking curbs might be temporarily
detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located
above or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity to the rear of the
vehicle.
•
To avoid vehicle damage the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using the Rear Park Assist
System to be able to stop in time when an obstacle
is detected. It is recommended that the driver look
over his/her shoulder when using the Rear Park
Assist System.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
3
NOTE:
•
Ensure that the rear bumper is free of dirt and debris
to keep the system operating properly.
•
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of the system.
Enabling and Disassembling The Rear Park Assist
System
There are times when you may want to disable the Rear
Park Assist System, such as when towing a trailer.
NOTE: The manufacturer suggests disabling the Rear
Park Assist System when towing a trailer. Refer to the
following procedures.
Vehicles Equipped With the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)
You can turn the Rear Park Assist System on or off
through the EVIC. For details, refer to “Personal Settings
(Customer Programmable Features)” under “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this
manual.
Vehicles Equipped With the Compass Mini-Trip
Computer (CMTC)
You can turn the Rear Park Assist System ON or OFF
through the CMTC by pressing the left reset button in the
instrument cluster. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position, then press and hold the rest button for approxi-
mately two seconds.
Service The Rear Park Assist System
If the Rear Park Assist System malfunctions, the instru-
ment cluster will actuate a single chime, once per ignition
cycle, and it will display the (SERVICE PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM( message. Refer to “Compass Mini Trip Com-
puter (CMTC) or “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” — as equipped, in Section 4 of this manual.
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If (SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM( appears in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), after mak-
ing sure the rear bumper is clean, please see your
authorized dealer.
Should this wrench symbol display with the
letter P next to it, your Park Sense System
needs servicing. Contact your authorized
dealer.
Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System
Clean the Rear Park Assist Sensors with water, car wash
soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do
not scratch or poke the sensors, otherwise, you could
damage the sensors.
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows both the brake and accelerator pedals to
move toward or away from the driver to provide improved
position with the steering wheel. The adjustable pedal
system is designed to allow a greater range of driver comfort
for steering wheel tilt and seat positions. The switch is
located on the left side of the steering column.
Adjustable Pedal Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
3
Press the button forward to move the pedals forward
(toward the front of the vehicle).
Press the button rearward to move the pedals rearward
(toward the driver).
•
The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
•
The pedals can be adjusted while driving.
•
The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control Sys-
tem is ON. The following messages will be displayed
on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle In-
formation System (EVIC) if the pedals are attempted to
be adjusted when the system is locked out (“Adjust-
able Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or
“Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”).
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become lim-
ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
adjustable pedal’s path.
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, this device takes over the accelerator
operation at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
Activating Electronic Speed Control
Push the ON/OFF button (located in the end of the lever)
once and the CRUISE indicator light (located in the
message window of the odometer) will illuminate show-
ing the electronic speed control system is on. To turn the
system OFF, push the ON/OFF button again and the
system and indicator will turn off.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidently
SET the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you aren’t using it.
Electronic Speed Control Switches
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
3
Setting Electronic Speed Control at a Desired
Speed
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press
the SET lever downward and then release. Lift your foot
off the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the
selected speed.
Deactivating Electronic Speed Control
A soft tap on the brake pedal or pulling the lever
CANCEL toward you, will deactivate the speed control
without erasing the set speed memory. Pushing the
ON/OFF button to the OFF position or turning OFF the
ignition erases the set speed memory.
Resuming Speed
To resume a previously set speed, raise the lever
RESUME/ACCEL upwards and release. Resume can be
used at any speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).
Varying The Speed Setting
When the speed control is SET, speed can be increased by
raising and holding the RESUME/ACCEL lever up-
wards. When released, a new set speed will be estab-
lished.
Raising the lever RESUME/ACCEL upwards once will
result in a 1 mph (1 km/h) speed increase. Each time the
lever is tapped upwards, speed increases so that tapping
the lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph (5
km/h), etc.
To decrease speed while speed control is SET, press the
lever SET/DECEL downward and hold. Release the lever
when the desired speed is reached, and the new speed
will be SET.
Tapping the lever SET/DECEL downward once will
result in a 1 mph (1 km/h) speed decrease. Each time the
lever is tapped downward, speed decreases.
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system has been
designed to shut down if multiple speed control switch
functions are operated simultaneously in order to ensure
proper operation. If this occurs, the system can be
reactivated by pushing the speed control switch ON/
OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle SET speed.
Accelerating To Pass
Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
NOTE: The speed control system maintains speed up
and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills
is normal.
Your vehicle may experience a downshift (automatic
transmissions only) while climbing uphill or descending
downhill. This downshift is necessary to maintain vehicle
set speed.
On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without speed control.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
can’t maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control. An accident could be the result. Don’t use
Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, or slippery.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
3
OVERHEAD CONSOLES
Front Overhead Console — If Equipped
Two versions of the overhead console are available. The
base front overhead console models feature fixed incan-
descent courtesy/reading lights, flip-down sunglass stor-
age and conversation mirror.
Premium front overhead console models feature an LED
focused light that illuminates the instrument panel cup
holders, Infrared Automatic Temperature Control Sensor
(ATC equipped only), two swiveling LED lights, flip-
down sunglass storage, conversation mirror, optional
power sliding door switches and an optional power
liftgate switch.
Front Premium Overhead Console Features
1 - Cupholder LED 4 - Storage/Mirror
2 - ATC Sensor 5 - Switch Bank
3 - Interior Lights
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Courtesy/Interior Lighting
At the forward end of the console are two courtesy lights
(standard dome light has two buttons). The lights turn on
when a front door, a sliding door or the liftgate is opened.
If your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry,
the lights will also turn on when the unlock button on the
transmitter is pressed.
The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Press
in on each lens to turn these lights on while inside the
vehicle. Press a second time to turn the each light off. You
may adjust the direction of these lights by pressing the
outside ring which is identified with four directional
arrows.
The area around the instrument panel cupholders is also
illuminated from a light in the overhead console. This
light is turned on when the headlight switch is on and
will adjust in brightness when the dimmer control is
rotated up or down.
Sunglass Storage
At the rear of the front overhead console, a compartment
is provided for the storage of two pairs of sunglasses.
Press the door latch to open the compartment. The door
will slowly rotate to an open position.
NOTE: The front overhead console used with factory
sunroof incorporates a sunroof switch.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
3
Rear Overhead Consoles — If Equipped
The rear overhead storage system is available in two
versions: with or without sunroof.
An additional LED at the front of the rear console shines
down on the second row footwell area while in courtesy
mode, for added convenience.
Overhead Compartment Features
1 — DVD
1
5 — Storage
2 — Rear HVAC 6 — DVD
1
3 — Interior Lights 7 — Interior Lights
4 — Storage 8 — Halo Lighting
1
If equipped, otherwise storage.
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights — If Equipped
The overhead console had two sets of courtesy lights. The
lights turn on when a front door, a sliding door or the
liftgate is opened. If your vehicle is equipped with
Remote Keyless Entry, the lights will also turn on when
the unlock button on the transmitter is pressed.
The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Press
in on each lens to turn these lights on while inside the
vehicle. Press a second time to turn the each light off. You
may adjust the direction of these lights by pressing the
outside ring which is identified with four directional
arrows.
Rear Console Halo Lighting — If Equipped
The rear overhead console features recessed halo lighting
around the perimeter of the console base. This feature
provides additional lighting options while traveling and
is controlled by the headlight switch. Refer to “Halo
Lighting - If Equipped” under “Lighting” in “Under-
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle” in Section 3.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLinkt replaces up to three remote controls (hand-
held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting, or home security
systems. The HomeLinkt unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
3
The HomeLinkt buttons that are located in the headliner
or sun visor designate the three different HomeLinkt
channels.
NOTE: HomeLinkt is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is active.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the Universal Transceiver. Do
not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the
path of the door or gate. Only use this transceiver
with a garage door opener that has a “stop and
reverse” feature as required by Federal safety stan-
dards. This includes most garage door opener models
manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door
opener without these safety features. Call toll-free
1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for safety information or
assistance.
HomeLinkt Buttons
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger-
ous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause seri-
ous injury or death.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINKT
Before You Begin
If you have not trained any of the HomeLinkt buttons,
erase all channels before you begin training.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the red indicator flashes.
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the
hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed
to HomeLinkt for more efficient training and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage
when programming.
Begin Programming
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Hold the battery side of the hand-held transmitter
away from the HomeLinkt button you wish to program.
Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) away
from the HomeLinkt button you wish to program while
keeping the indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen
HomeLinkt button and the hand-held transmitter button
until the HomeLinkt indicator changes from a slow to a
rapidly blinking light, then release both the HomeLinkt
and hand-held transmitter buttons.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
3
Watch for the HomeLinkt indicator to change flash rates.
When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to 30
seconds, or longer in rare cases. The garage door may
open and close while you train.
NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers
may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted
in the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section.
NOTE: After training a HomeLinkt channel, if the
garage door does not operate with HomeLinkt and the
garage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the
garage door opener may have a rolling code. If so,
proceed to Step 5 “Programming A Rolling Code Sys-
tem.”
4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLinkt button
and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is
complete and the garage door (or device) should activate
when the HomeLinkt button is pressed.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds, and
then turns to a constant light, proceed to Step 5 “Pro-
gramming A Rolling Code System.”
5. Programming A Rolling Code System
At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “Learn” or “Training” button.
This can usually be found where the hanging antenna
wire is attached to the garage door opener motor (it is
NOT the button normally used to open and close the
door).
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
6. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Training”
button. The name and color of the button may vary by
manufacturer.
NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the “Learn” button has been pressed.
7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLinkt button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and
activates, programming is complete.
If the device does not activate, press the button a third
time (for two seconds) to complete the training.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
To program the remaining two HomeLinkt buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER TRAIN BUTTON
1 — Door Opener 2 — Training Button
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
3
Using HomeLinkt
To operate, simply press and release the programmed
HomeLinkt button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc. The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be
used at any time.
Reprogramming a Single Homelinkt Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLinkt button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Program-
ming Homelinkt Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
GATE OPERATOR/CANADIAN PROGRAMMING
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLinkt
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
If you are having difficulties programming a garage door
opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming
HomeLinkt” Step 3, with the following:
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLinkt button
while you press and release - every two seconds
(“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until HomeLinkt
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The
indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
fully trained.
If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in
at this time.
Then proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
HomeLinkt,” earlier in this section.
SECURITY
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLinkt Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
If you are having trouble programming HomeLinkt, here
are some of the most common solutions:
•
Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
•
Press the “Learn” button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
•
Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
GENERAL INFORMATION
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
3
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: The transmitter has been tested and it complies
with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
The term IC before the certification/registration number
only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifica-
tions were met.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof control switch is located in the front
overhead console.
The sunroof panel tilts upward at the rear for ventilation
or slides rearward under the roof.
Power Sunroof Operation
Opening the Sunroof Manually
Press the switch rearward and hold, and the sunroof will
open automatically from any position. The sunroof will
open fully, then stop automatically. During this opera-
tion, any release of the sunroof switch will stop the
sunroof.
WARNING!
In an accident, there is greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also
be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your
seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are
properly secured too.
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Closing the Sunroof Manually
To close the sunroof from an open or vent position, press
and hold the switch forward. The sunroof will close fully
and stop automatically. Release the switch to stop sun-
roof travel at any point.
Sunroof Sunshade Operation
The sunroof sunshade can be opened manually. How-
ever, the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof
opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the power
sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
Express-Open
Press the switch rearward and release, and the sunroof
will open automatically from any position. The sunroof
will open fully, then stop automatically. This is called
Express-Open. During Express-Open operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
3
Express-Vent
Press and release the 9V9 button, and the sunroof will
automatically open to the vent position. This is called
Express-Vent.
Express-Close
Press the switch forward and release, and the sunroof
will close automatically from any position. The sunroof
will close fully, then stop automatically. This is called
Express-Close. During Express-Close operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
WARNING!
Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow fingers or other body parts, or any object
to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may
result.
Ignition OFF Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for 10
minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature.
Auto-Express with Anti–Pinch Protection
During express closing, anytime an obstacle that restricts
glass movement is detected, the motor will stop and
reverse travel to avoid pinching the object.
Auto Express will stop and reverse travel up to three
times in succession. After the third time, Auto Express
will enter a manual operation mode. This allows the
operator to manually control the power switch in order to
close or open the sunroof in case of a malfunction.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS — IF EQUIPPED
Two 12 volt power outlets are located in the center lower
instrument panel next to the open storage bin. The upper
outlet is controlled by the ignition switch and the lower
outlet is connected directly to the battery. The upper
outlet will also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit
(if equipped with an optional Smoker’s Package).
The outlets include tethered caps labeled with a key or
battery symbol indicating the power source. The lower
instrument panel outlet is powered directly from the
battery, items plugged into this outlet may discharge the
battery and/or prevent engine starting.
The lower outlet is protected by an automatic reset circuit
breaker. The automatic circuit breaker restores power
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
3
when the overload is removed. The circuit breaker also
supplies power to the outlet in the removable floor
console, when in the front position. Refer to section 3
“Removable Floor Console” in this manual.
A third outlet is located on the driver’s side, just to the
rear of the sliding door and is also controlled by the
ignition switch. The lower and rear outlets will not
accommodate a conventional cigar lighter unit.
NOTE: If desired, all of the power outlets can be
converted by your authorized dealer to provide power
with the ignition switch in the OFF position.
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
A 110 volt, 150 watt inverter outlet (if equipped) converts
DC current to AC current and is located on the left rear
trim panel immediately behind the second row left
passenger seat. This outlet can be used to power small
appliances and electronics.
The Power Inverter switch is located near the center of
the instrument panel below the two 12 volt power
outlets. Press the switch to turn the power on for the
outlet, press the switch a second time to turn the power
off.
110 Volt Power Inverter
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•
When the Inverter Switch is pressed, there will be a
delay of approximately one second before the inverter
status indicator turns ON. The status indicator of the
AC power inverter indicates whether the inverter is
producing AC power.
•
Due to built-in overload protection the inverter will
shut down if the power rating is exceeded.
WARNING!
To Avoid Serious Injury or Death:
•
Do not use a Three–Prong Adaptor.
•
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
•
Do not touch with wet hands.
•
Close the lid when not in use.
•
If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Inverter Outlet Power Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
3
ELECTRICAL OUTLET USE WITH ENGINE OFF
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently
to degrade battery life and/or prevent engine starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, vacuum
cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the battery even more
quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater
caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories
still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient
length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the
vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do
not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from
the plug. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage.
SUN SCREENS— IF EQUIPPED
Sun Screens are available for second and third row
seating windows. The screens store in the sill trim panels
and the tops of the windows are equipped with hooks
that the Sun Screen attaches to when pulled out.
Sun Screen Retracted
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Gently pull up on the tab to raise the sun screen.
Continue pulling the sun screen until the tab is near the
top of the window.
Once the screen is completely to the top of the window,
extend the top bar of the sun screen over the two hooks
attached to the top of the window.
To lower the sun screen, gently lift the tab upwards to
disengage the hooks and feed the screen back into the
base sill.
Sun Screen Attaching To Retainer Clips
Sun Screen Extended
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
3
CUP HOLDERS AND CONVENIENCE TRAY
DRAWER
There are nine cup holders in the interior. Two cup
holders in the center front instrument panel, four in the
floor consoles and three more are located in the third row
quarter trim panel.
All liners are removable for cleaning. Pull the flexible
liner from the cup holder drawer or tray; starting at one
edge to ease removal. Refer to “Cleaning The Instrument
Panel Cup Holders” in Section 7.
Instrument Panel Cup Holders
The instrument panel cup holders are located in a pull
out drawer just above the lower storage bin.
Pull the drawer out firmly until it stops, and place the
container to be held in either one of the cup holder wells.
The cup holders are designed to accommodate a wide
variety of container types and sizes. Press down on the
container to engage the cup holder retention fingers.
Front Cup Holders
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Bottle Holders
There are four bottle holders located in the interior. One
bottle holder is molded into each front interior door trim
panels, and one bottle holder is molded into each side
sliding interior door trim panel. Each holder accommo-
dates up to 20 oz. (.6 L) size plastic bottles.
Two outboard mesh pockets on intermediate seating. The
mesh pockets are flexible enough to hold juice boxes,
toys, games or MP3 players, etc.
Smokers Package Kit — If Equipped
With the optional authorized dealer-installed Smokers
Package Kit, a removable ash receiver is inserted into one
of the two cup holders in the center front instrument
panel. To install the ash receiver, align the receiver so the
thumb grip on the lid is facing rearward. Press the ash
receiver into either of the cup wells to secure. Pull
upward on the ash receiver to remove for cleaning
and/or storage.
The left rear trim panel cup holder is designed to
accommodate a second ash receiver if desired.
CONSOLE FEATURES
There are two consoles available: Basic and Premium.
Basic Console
Basic Console features consist of the following:
•
The basic console profile allows vehicle occupants to
easily pass through the first row to the second.
•
Four cup holders can accept extra large size beverage
cups or 20 oz (.6 L) plastic bottles. The cup holders are
dishwasher safe for cleaning. To remove, pull the
flexible liner from the cup holder drawer or tray;
starting at one edge. Refer to “Cleaning The Instru-
ment Panel Cup Holders” in Section 7 for more
detailed information.
•
A Top Storage Tray.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
3
•
The cup holder/tray top is removable to access a large
storage bin.
•
The Basic Console is removable from the vehicle for
additional floor space by removing the cap at the
console base.
To Remove The Basic Floor Console
•
Remove the front anchor cup plug and clip.
Basic Console Features
1 - Console Anchor 3 - Front Cup holders
2 - Top Tray 4 - Rear Cup holders
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
Slide the console base forward while lifting slightly to
clear the rear load floor hook.
•
Remove the console.
To Reinstall The Basic Floor Console
•
Position the console at a slight angle (front slightly
higher than the rear.
•
Slide the console rearward into the floor bracket/
hook.
•
Align the console until the front anchor cup plug hole
is centered on the winch hole.
•
Reinstall the clip first and then while pushing down-
ward on the console with slight pressure, reinstall the
cover plug.
•
Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly latched.
WARNING!
In an accident, serious injury could result if the
removable floor console is not properly installed.
Always be sure the removable floor console is fully
latched.
Premium Console – If Equipped
The three-compartment console with sliding storage bin,
sliding upper tray with storage and large console storage
bin offers multiple configurations.
•
Four cup holders can accept large cups or mugs with
handles or 20 oz (.6 L) plastic bottles. The cup holders
are dishwasher safe for cleaning. To remove, pull the
flexible liner from the cup holder drawer or tray;
starting at one edge. Refer to “Cleaning The Instru-
ment Panel Cup Holders” in Section 7 for more
detailed information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
3
•
Top Tray Storage
•
Upper Storage Bin can hold nine regular or 18 thin
CD’s or other items
•
Large Console Center Storage will store headphones
for the available rear DVD entertainment system or
other items
•
12–Volt DC Power Outlet provides continuous power
inside the console for cell phones or other electronics.
•
Rear Occupant Accessible
•
Multiple Adjustments
•
Removable from vehicle for additional floor space.
Premium Console Features
1 - Top Release 3 - Console Release
2 - Center Release
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The top and center console sections slide forward and
rearward to provide added user comfort. Four cup hold-
ers, each of which can accommodate large sized beverage
containers. Aone-piece cup holder insert for both cavities
can easily be removed for cleaning. The cup holders will
also accommodate large size cups and 20 oz (.6 L) bottles.
Position 1 shows the console closed with four cup
holders and a convenient storage tray.
Console Position 1
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
3
Position 2 shows the raised storage tray revealing a large
storage area below.
Dual Storage Bins
Position 3 shows the top portion of the console in a
rearward position. This is accomplished by lifting the
upper most latch at the front of the console. This provides
easy access to the storage area below and provides two of
the four cup holders for the second row passengers.
Position 4 shows the complete console in its rearmost
position. Again, lifting second latch handle at the front of
the console, allows complete access to a lower storage bin
and provides additional cup holders for rear passengers.
Console Position 2 Console Position 3
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Remove The Premium Floor Console
•
Pull up on the bottom release handle in the front of the
console
•
Lift the rear of the console up several inches
•
Pull rearward to disengage from floor and remove
console
To reinstall the console:
•
Position the console at a slight angle (rear slightly
higher than the front
•
Slide the console forward into the floor bracket
•
Rotate the rear of the console down until it is resting
on the floor bracket
•
Push down on the rear of the console until it is seated
in the rear floor bracket
•
Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly latched
Console Position 4
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
3
WARNING!
In an accident, serious injury could result if the
removable floor console is not properly installed.
Always be sure the removable floor console is fully
latched.
STORAGE
Glove Compartments
There are both upper and lower glove compartments.
Upper Glove Compartment
To open the upper compartment (4), press inward on the
release button (3). The door will spring open about one in
(2.54 cm). Manually lift the front edge of the door
upward, until fully opened, and the detent is engaged.
To close the compartment door, push firmly downward
on the door’s surface to release the detent and latch the
door closed.
Glove Compartment Features
1 - Lower Compartment 3 - Upper Latch
2 - Lower Latch/Lock 4 - Upper Compartment
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lower Glove Compartment
To open the lower compartment (1) pull out on the
release handle (2). The lower compartment handle is also
equipped with a lock.
Door Trim Panel Storage
Front Door Storage
Both interior front door panels have multiple pockets for
storage.
Front Door Storage
1 - Rear Map Pocket 3 - Bottle Holder
2 - Storage Pocket 4 - Front Map Pocket
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
3
Sliding Side Door Bottle Holder
Both sliding doors have a bottle holder molded right into
the trim.
Second Row Floor Storage Bins — If Equipped
The Second Row Seat Storage Bins are located on the
floor in front of the second row seats. The area below the
floor covers can be used for storage when the second row
seat is in the upright position.
Sliding Door Bottle Holder
Storage Bin Cover Lock Release
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover. Slide
the storage bin locking mechanism to the 9unlocked9
position to allow greater access to the storage bin.
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must lay flat and be locked to
avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,
which have minimal clearance to the cover.
WARNING!
In an accident, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
•
DO NOT drive the vehicle with the storage bin
covers open.
•
Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched
while the vehicle is in motion.
•
DO NOT use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
Removing The Floor Console With Stow ’n Go
Seating — If Equipped
The removable floor console has two power outlets,
storage tray, light, removable cell phone holder, tissue
holder, pen holder and a map holder. It can be removed
from the vehicle by pulling the release handle inside the
floor console.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
3
To remove the console use the following procedure:
1. Open the console lid and remove the storage tray.
2. Pull up on the release handle located inside the floor
console, and slide the console rearward to disengage
from the floor.
3. Remove the floor console.
To reinstall the console use the following procedure:
1. Open the console lid and remove the storage tray.
2. Pull up on the release handle and slide the console
forward to engage the front of the console into the floor
tray.
3. Pivot the floor console down until it is seated on the
floor tray and release the handle.
4. Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly attached.
Removable Floor Console Features
1 - Removal Latch 4 - Front Cupholders
2 - Lower Latch 5 - Top Tray
3 - Upper Latch 6 - Rear Cupholders
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
In an accident, serious injury could result if the
removable floor console is not properly installed.
Always be sure the removable floor console is fully
latched.
Rear Compartment Storage
Your vehicle is equipped with open storage areas located
in each rear trim panel.
Third Row Rear Seat and Rear Compartment Features
1 — Tie Down 5 — Liftgate Close
2 — Rear Switches 6 — Bag Holders
3 — Tire Jack/Handle 7 — LATCH Anchor
4 — Cubby/Speaker 8 — Flash Light
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
3
Coat Hooks
Coat hooks are located along the headliner for the second
and third row seating positions. The coat hook load limit
is 10 lbs (4.5 kg). Exceeding the recommended load limit
can cause the coat hooks to break or disengage from the
vehicle.
Cargo Area Storage
The seats in your vehicle are in-line which enables you to
stow long objects, such as lumber or skis, on the floor
without moving the seats.
NOTE: With all rear seat backs folded,a4ftx8ft(1.2 m
x 2.4 m) sheet of building material may be stored on top
of the folded seats with the liftgate closed. The front seats
must be moved slightly forward of the rearmost position.
If the rear seats are removed no front seat adjustment is
needed and more than one 4 ftx8ft(1.2 m x 2.4 m) sheet
of building material may be stored.
The liftgate sill plate has a raised line with the statement
“Load To This Line”. This line indicates how far rearward
cargo can be placed without interfering with liftgate
closing.
Rear Cargo Area Loading Limit
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the
weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The
load must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be
uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars.
The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo
inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not
exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
To move the crossbars, loosen the thumb screws located
at the upper edge of each crossbar approximately six
turns, then move the crossbar to the desired position,
keeping the crossbars parallel to the rack frame. Once the
crossbar is in place, retighten the thumb screws to lock
the crossbar into position.
Attempt to move the crossbar again to ensure that it has
properly locked into position.
NOTE: To help control wind noise when installing the
crossbars make sure the arrows marked on the underside
of the crossbars are facing the front of the vehicle. When
the crossbars are not in use, the front crossbar should be
fastened just forward of the middle support and the rear
crossbar should be fastened at the rearmost position of
the side rails. This will help reduce the amount of wind
noise when the crossbars are not in use.
The tie down holes on the crossbar ends should always
be used to tie down the load. Check the straps frequently
to be sure that the load remains securely attached.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
3
CAUTION!
•
Crossbars should remain equally spaced or paral-
lel at any luggage rack position for proper func-
tion. Noncompliance could result in damage to the
luggage rack, cargo and/or vehicle.
•
To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of
150 lbs (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as
evenly as possible and secure the load
appropriately.
CAUTION!
•
Long loads which extend over the windshield,
such as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with
large frontal area should be secured to both the
front and rear of the vehicle.
•
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners care-
fully when carrying large or heavy loads on the
roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or
nearby truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to
a load. This is especially true on large flat loads
and may result in damage to the cargo or your
vehicle.
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in per-
sonal injury or property damage. Follow the Roof
Rack Cautions when carrying cargo on your roof
rack.
UMBRELLA HOLDER
An umbrella holder has been conveniently molded into
the left front door entry scuff molding.
Umbrella Holder
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
3
LOAD-LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The automatic load-leveling system will provide a level
riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading
conditions.
A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers
raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height. It takes
approximately 1 mile (1.6 km) of driving for the leveling
to complete depending on road surface conditions.
If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15
hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down. The
vehicle must be driven to reset the system.
WARNING!
Do not install the load-leveling system on vehicles
that are not equipped with Anti-Lock Brakes. Ve-
hicles without Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS) have a height-
sensing proportioning valve. Installing a leveling
system will render this system ineffective, inappro-
priately reducing rear brake pressure, resulting in
increased stopping distances. You could have a seri-
ous accident.
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
m Instrument Panels And Controls ............223
m Base Instrument Cluster ..................224
m Premium Instrument Cluster ...............225
m Instrument Cluster Descriptions ............226
m Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) —
If Equipped ...........................238
▫ Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC)
Odometer Displays ....................238
▫ Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) Reset
Buttons ............................238
▫ Compass/Temperature Display ...........240
m Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) —
If Equipped ...........................241
▫ EVIC Displays .......................243
▫ Trip Functions .......................244
▫ Compass Display .....................246
▫ Personal Settings
(Customer Programmable Features) ........248
m Radio General Information ................251
▫ Radio Broadcast Signals .................251
4
m Sales Code REQ — AM/FM Stereo Radio And
6–Disc CD/DVD Changer
(MP3/WMA AUX Jack) ..................252
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode .......252
▫ Operation Instructions - (Disc Mode For CD
And MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-Video) ....260
▫ Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files ........262
▫ List Button
(Disc Mode For MP3/WMA Play) ..........265
▫ Info Button
(Disc Mode For MP3/WMA Play) ..........265
m Sales Code RES — AM/FM Stereo Radio With
CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack) ................268
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode .......268
▫ Operation Instructions - CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play ..................274
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files .............276
▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) .......279
▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) .......279
m Sales Code REN — Multimedia System —
If Equipped ...........................280
▫ Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio
(If Equipped) ........................281
▫ Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition
System (VR) (If Equipped) ...............281
▫ Operating Instructions — Hands-Free
Communication (UConnectt) (If Equipped) . . .281
▫ Clock Setting Procedure.................281
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
m Sales Code RER — Multimedia System —
If Equipped ...........................283
▫ Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio .....284
▫ Operating Instructions — Hands-Free
Communication (UConnectt) (If Equipped) . . .284
▫ Clock Setting Procedure.................285
m Satellite Radio — If Equipped
(REN/REQ/RER/RES/REU Radios Only) .....287
▫ System Activation .....................287
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID) ....................287
▫ Selecting Satellite Mode .................288
▫ Satellite Antenna ......................288
▫ Reception Quality .....................289
▫ Operating Instructions - Satellite Mode ......289
▫ Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone
(If Equipped) ........................292
▫ Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VESt) (If Equipped) .............292
m Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) —
If Equipped ...........................292
▫ Connecting The iPodt Device ............293
▫ Controlling The iPodt Using Radio Buttons . . .293
▫ Play Mode ..........................293
▫ List Or Browse Mode ..................295
m Sirius Backseat TV™ — If Equipped .........297
m Video Entertainment System (VESt)—
If Equipped ...........................297
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
4
m Radio Operation And Cellular Phones ........299
m Remote Sound System Controls — If Equipped . .299
▫ Radio Operation ......................299
▫ CD Player ..........................300
m CD/DVD Maintenance ...................300
m Climate Controls .......................301
▫ Manual Heating, Ventilation And Air
Conditioning (HVAC) System .............301
▫ Rear Manual Climate Control Zone —
If Equipped .........................307
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped .........................309
▫ Summer Operation ....................318
▫ Winter Operation .....................318
▫ Vacation/Storage .....................318
▫ Window Fogging .....................318
▫ Outside Air Intake ....................319
▫ Operating Tips .......................319
▫ A/C Air Filter — If Equipped ............320
m Electric Rear Window Defroster —
If Equipped ...........................320
222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANELS AND CONTROLS
1 - Air Vents 6 - Upper Glove Compartment 11 - Storage Bin 16 - Head Light Switch
2 - Instrument Cluster 7 - Lower Glove Compartment 12 - Power Supply 12V 17 - Power Inverter Switch
3 - Gear Selector Lever 8 - Climate Controls 13 - Hazard Switch
4 - Radio 9 - Storage or DVD 14 - Ignition Switch
5 - Storage Bin 10 - Cup Holders 15 - Dimmer Switch
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223
4
BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225
4
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
2. Fuel Door Reminder
The arrow in this symbol is a reminder that the
Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of the
vehicle.
3. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads
“H“, pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H”, and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately, and call an autho-
rized dealer for service.
226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer if
your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under
the hood yourself, see Section 7 of this manual.
Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pres-
sure Cap paragraph.
4. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
5. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
when the turn signal lever is operated.
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has
traveled about one mile with the turn signals on, a
continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the
signals off. If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check
for a defective outside light bulb.
6. High Beam Light
This light shows that the headlights are on high
beam. Pull the turn signal lever towards the
steering wheel to switch the headlights from high or low
beam.
7. Anti-Lock Brake System Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake Sys-
tem. The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227
4
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
light inspected by an authorized dealer.
8. Brake System Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on, it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system (if equipped).
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. Failure of either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger-
ous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have an
accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked
by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to
the ON position. The light should illuminate for approxi-
mately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected.
If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected
by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
9. Tachometer — Premium Instrument Cluster Only
The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine
revolutions-per-minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear range.
Before reaching the red area, ease up on the accelerator to
prevent engine damage.
10. Transmission Range Indicator
This display indicator shows the automatic transaxle gear
selection.
NOTE: You must apply the brakes before shifting from
Park.
11. Odometer/Trip Odometer — If Equipped
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has
been driven.
U.S. federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. There-
fore, if the odometer reading is changed during repair or
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229
4
replacement, be sure to keep a record of the reading
before and after the service so that the correct mileage can
be determined.
The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage. To
switch from odometer to trip odometer, press the Trip
Odometer button.
To reset a trip odometer, display the desired trip odom-
eter to be reset then push and hold the button until the
display resets (approximately two seconds).
12. PRNDL/Odometer Display Area
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
odometer messages will display:
CHAngE OIL ...............OilChange Required
CRUISE.....................Cruise Control On
door .............................Door Ajar
ESPOFF ............................ESPOff
gATE ..........................Lift Gate Ajar
gASCAP .......................Fuel Cap Fault
hood*............................Hood Ajar
noFUSE ..........................Fuse Fault
LoCOOL ........................LowCoolant
LoWASH ....................LowWasher Fluid
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with an hood switch,
in the case of hood ajar, a warning message will be
displayed in either the PRNDL/Odometer display as
“hood” or “Hood Ajar” in the EVIC display.
NOTE: Some of the above warnings will be displayed in
the Compass Mini-Trip Computer / Electronic Vehicle
Information Center Display Area under the Speedometer.
CHAngE OIL
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Change Oil” message will flash in
the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12
230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle-based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument
cluster. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the fol-
lowing procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not
start the engine).
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary repeat this procedure.
13. Odometer Display Reset Button
To reset a message display (gATE, gASCAP, noFUSE,
CHAngE OIL, LoCOOL, LoWASH), push and hold the
button until the display resets (approximately two sec-
onds).
14. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator
Light/Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator Light
If this indicator light flashes during accelera-
tion, apply as little throttle as possible. While
driving, ease up on the accelerator. Adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road con-
ditions, and do not switch off the ESP, or TCS.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231
4
15. Malfunction Indicator Light
This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system
called OBD that monitors engine and automatic
transmission control systems. The light will illu-
minate when the key is in the ON position before engine
start. If the bulb does not come on when turning the key
from OFF to ON, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc. may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
The Malfunction Indicator Light flashes to alert to serious
conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or
severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be
serviced at an authorized dealer as soon as possible if this
occurs.
16. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
tion. If the engine is critically hot, a continuous
chime will sound for four minutes. After the chime
turns off, the engine will still be critically hot until the
light turns off.
17. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC.) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control system. If a prob-
lem is detected, the light will come on while the
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when
the vehicle has completely stopped and the gear selector
is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.
If the light remains lit with the engine running your
vehicle will usually be drivable, however, see your dealer
for service as soon as possible. If the light is flashing
when the engine is running, immediate service is re-
quired and you may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may
232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
require towing. The light will come on when the ignition
is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check.
If the light does not come on during starting, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
18. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light shows low engine oil pressure. The light
should turn on momentarily when the engine is
started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns
on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
19. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This light shows when the front fog lights are ON.
20. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this
light will turn on for five to eight seconds as a bulb
check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat
belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb
check or when driving, if the driver’s seat belt remains
unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate
and the chime will sound. Refer to the Occupant Re-
straints section for more information.
21. Vehicle Theft Alarm Light — If Equipped
This light will flash for approximately 15 sec-
onds when the vehicle theft alarm is arming.
22. Airbag Light
This light turns on and remains on for four
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
switch is first turned ON. If the light is not on
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233
4
during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have
the system inspected by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
23. Voltage Light
This light monitors the electrical system voltage.
The light should turn on momentarily as the
engine is started. If the light stays on or turns on while
driving, it indicates a problem with the charging system.
Immediate service should be obtained.
24. Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.0
gallons (7.8 liters) this light will turn on and remain
on until fuel is added.
25. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp — If
Equipped
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and in-
flated to the inflation pressure recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of
a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should deter-
mine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also
234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
NOTE: Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underin-
flation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly.
NOTE:
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants
or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235
4
For additional information on TPMS, refer to Section 5 —
Starting and Operating, “Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-
tem” of this manual.
For additional information on Tire Pressures, refer to
Section 5 — Starting and Operating, “Tire Inflation
Pressures” of this manual.
26. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator Light
The malfunction lamp for the ESP is combined
with BAS. The yellow “ESP/BAS Warning
Lamp” comes on when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position. They should go
out with the engine running. If the “ESP/BAS Warning
Lamp” comes on continuously with the engine running,
a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the
BAS system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles/
kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
27. Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) Reset
Button
Press the reset button to scroll through sub menus (i.e.,
Trip Functions: AVG Fuel Economy, DTE, Elapsed Time,
and Units.
NOTE: For more detailed operation, refer to “Compass
Mini-Trip Computer” later in this section.
28. Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) Display /
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display—
If Equipped
Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) — If Equipped
On vehicles equipped with CMTC, the display provides
the outside temperature, one of eight compass headings
to indicate the direction the vehicle is facing and the
current radio station. Refer to “Compass Mini-Trip Com-
puter” later in this section.
236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display
— If Equipped
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
lower half of the speedometer.
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The Oil Change Required message will
flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds
after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
release the Menu button. To reset the oil change indicator
system (after performing the scheduled maintenance)
refer to the following procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not
start the engine).
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary repeat this procedure.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237
4
COMPASS MINI-TRIP COMPUTER (CMTC) — IF
EQUIPPED
NOTE: The compass on your vehicle is self-calibrating,
eliminating the need to manually calibrate the compass.
The Compass Mini-Trip Computer features a driver-
interactive display (displays information on outside tem-
perature, compass direction, and trip information). It is
located in the instrument cluster, below the Fuel and
Temperature gauges.
Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) Odometer
Displays
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
odometer messages will display:
CHAngE OIL ...............OilChange Required
CRUISE ......................Cruise Activated
door .............................Door Ajar
ESPOFF ......................ESPDeactivated
gATE ..........................Lift Gate Ajar
gASCAP .......................Fuel Cap Fault
hood ............................Hood Ajar
noFUSE ..........................Fuse Fault
LoCOOL ........................LowCoolant
LoWASH ....................LowWasher Fluid
These messages can be manually turned off by pressing
the right reset button (on the instrument cluster).
Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) Reset
Buttons
CMTC Reset Button
Press the left reset button located on the instrument
cluster to scroll through the sub menus (i.e., Trip Func-
tions: AVG Fuel Economy, DTE, Elapsed Time, and
Units).
238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To reset the display shown, turn the ignition switch to the
ON position, then press and hold the reset button for
approximately two seconds.
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
odometer messages will display:
NE .......Eight-point compass headings are displayed
(N, S, E, W, NE, NW, SE, SW)
14°F............Temperature (Fahrenheit or Celsius)
AV G .........AverageFuel Economy (U.S. or Metric)
DTE .......................Distance to Empty
ET ............................Elapsed Time
P..........................ParkAssist On/Off
Should this wrench symbol display with the
letter P next to it, your Park Assist System
needs servicing. Contact your authorized
dealer.
NOTE: Temperature and Average Fuel Economy can be
changed from U.S. or Metric by pressing and holding the
left CMTC Reset Button located on the instrument cluster
near the temperature gauge.
Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) Trip
Odometer (ODO)
This display shows the distance traveled since the last
reset. Press and release the right button located on the
instrument cluster to switch from odometer, to trip A or
trip B. Press and hold the right button while the
odometer/trip odometer is displayed to reset.
Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
reset.
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239
4
Compass/Temperature Display
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
North and Geographic North. In some areas of the
country, the difference between magnetic and geographic
North is great enough to cause the compass to give false
readings. In order to ensure compass accuracy, the com-
pass variance should be properly set according to the
compass variance map zone that the vehicle is in.
NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from
the top of the instrument panel. This is where the
compass sensor is located.
To Set the Variance
NOTE: Refer to the “Compass Variance Map” in the
following “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” section for your Zone Value.
Start the engine, and leave the transmission gear selector
lever in the PARK position. Press and hold (approxi-
mately ten seconds) the CMTC reset button until the
current variance zone number is displayed. To change the
zone, press and release the CMTC reset button to incre-
ment the variance one step. Repeat as necessary, until the
desired variance is achieved.
NOTE: The factory default Zone is 8. During program-
ming, the zone value will wrap around from Zone 15 to
Zone 1.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic, inaccurate or abnormal,
you may wish to calibrate the compass. Prior to calibrat-
ing the compass make sure the proper zone is selected.
1. Start the engine, and leave the transmission in the
PARK position.
240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Press and hold (approximately 10 seconds) the CMTC
reset button until the current variance zone number is
displayed.
3. Release the CMTC reset button, then press and hold
again (approximately 10 seconds), until the direction is
displayed with the CAL indicator on continuously in the
display.
4. To complete the compass calibration, drive the vehicle
in one or more complete 360 degree circles under 5 mph
(8 km/h) in an area free from power lines, large metallic
objects, until the CAL indicator turns off. The compass
will now function normally.
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The compass on your vehicle is self-calibrating,
eliminating the need to manually calibrate the compass.
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
lower half of the speedometer.
This system conveniently allows the driver to select a
variety of useful information by pressing the switches
mounted on the steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the
following:
•
System Status display
•
Vehicle information warning message displays
•
Tire Pressure Monitor System
•
Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241
4
•
Compass display
•
Outside temperature display
•
Trip computer functions
•
Audio Modes display
EVIC Menu / Step Control Button as it
appears on the left side of the steering
column.
Press and release the MENU button and the
mode displayed will change between
Compass/Temperature, Trip, System Status,
and Personal Settings.
Press the STEP button to scroll through sub
menus (i.e. Trip Functions, Avg. Fuel Economy,
DTE, Elapsed Time, and Units.
Steering Wheel EVIC Compass/Temp
Control Button as it appears on the
right side of the steering column
Press and release the C/T button to for instant
access to the Compass/Temperature Screens.
Press this button to RESET Trip Functions and
Change Personal Settings.
242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EVIC Displays
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
the following messages:
•
Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in
motion)
•
Liftgate Ajar (chime will sound when vehicle starts
moving)
•
Hood Ajar (If equipped with hood switch)
•
Check TPM System. Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing System” in Section 5 of this manual.
•
Turn Signal On
•
RKE Battery Low
•
LOW WASHER FLUID
•
Oil Change Required
•
Left Front Turn Signal Light Out
•
Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out
•
Right Front Turn Signal Light Out
•
Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out
•
Park Assist Disabled
•
Service Park Assist System
•
Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not in Park
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The Oil Change Required message will
flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds
after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243
4
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
release the Menu button. To reset the oil change indicator
system (after performing the scheduled maintenance)
refer to the following procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not
start the engine).
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary repeat this procedure.
TRIP FUNCTIONS
Press and release the MENU button until one of the
following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC:
Press the STEP button to scroll through all the Trip
Computer functions.
The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa-
tion:
Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
history information will be erased, and the averaging will
continue from the last fuel average reading before the
reset.
244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
to a text display of 9LOW FUEL.9 This display will
continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the
9LOW FUEL9 text and a new DTE value will display.
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
Display Units of Measure in:
To make your selection, press and release the STEP
button until “US” or “METRIC” appears.
To Reset The Display
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being
displayed. Press and release the RESET button once to
clear the resettable function being displayed. To reset all
resettable functions, press and release the RESET button
a second time within three seconds of resetting the
currently displayed function (Reset ALL will display
during this three-second window).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245
4
COMPASS DISPLAY
The compass readings indicate the direction
the vehicle is facing. Press and release the
compass button to display one of eight com-
pass readings and the outside temperature.
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more
360° turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic
objects) until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC
turns off. The compass will now function normally.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows:
1. Turn on the ignition switch.
2. Press the MENU button until Personal Settings (Cus-
tomer Programmable Features) menu is reached.
3. Press the STEP button until “Calibrate Compass” is
displayed in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the RESET button to start the cali-
bration. The “CAL” indicator will be displayed in the
EVIC.
5. Complete one or more 360° turns (in an area free from
large metal or metallic objects) until the CAL indicator
turns off. The compass will now function normally.
246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
North and Geographic North. In some areas of the
country, the difference between magnetic and geographic
North is great enough to cause the compass to give false
readings. For the most accurate compass performance,
the compass variance must be set using the following
procedure:
NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from
the top of the instrument panel. This is where the
compass sensor is located.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247
4
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Press and hold the compass button for approximately
two seconds.
3. Press the STEP button until “Compass Variance” mes-
sage and the last variance zone number displays in the
EVIC.
4. Press and release STEP button until the proper vari-
ance zone is selected according to the map.
5. Press and release the compass button to exit.
PERSONAL SETTINGS (CUSTOMER
PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES)
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall
features when the transmission is in PARK. If the trans-
mission is out of PARK or the vehicle begins moving, a
warning message PERSONAL SETTING NOT AVAIL-
ABLE followed in three seconds by VEHICLE NOT IN
PARK.
Press and release the MENU button until Personal Set-
tings displays in the EVIC.
Use the Step button to display one of the following
choices:
Language
When in this display you may select one of five lan-
guages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press
the reset button while in this display to select English,
Spanish (Español), French (Français), Italian (Italiano),
German (Deutsch), and Dutch (Nederlands). Then, as
you continue, the information will display in the selected
language.
Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph (24 km/h)
When ON is selected, all doors will lock automatically
when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).
To make your selection, press and release the RESET
button until ON or OFF appears.
248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit
When ON is selected, all doors will unlock when the
vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To
make your selection, press and release the RESET button
until ON or OFF appears.
Remote Key Unlock
When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’s
door will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless
entry unlock button. When Driver Door 1st Press is
selected, you must press of the remote keyless entry
unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
When All Doors 1st Press is selected, all of the doors will
unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry
unlock button. To make your selection, press and release
the RESET button until “Driver Door 1st Press” or “All
Doors 1st Press” appears.
Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock
When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when
the remote keyless entry LOCK button is pressed. This
feature may be selected with or without the flash lights
on lock/unlock feature. To make your selection, press
and release the RESET button until ON or OFF appears.
Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
remote keyless entry transmitter. This feature may be
selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature
selected. To make your selection, press and release the
RESET button until ON or OFF appears.
Automatic High Beams — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249
4
SELECT button until YES (Y) or NO (N) appears. Refer to
“Lights/SmartBeams — If Equipped” in Section 3 of this
manual for more information.
Headlights On with Wipers (Available with Auto
Headlights Only)
When YES (Y) is selected, and the headlight switch is in
the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approxi-
mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The
headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned
off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your
selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button until YES (Y) or NO (N) appears.
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
brightness, refer to “Lights” in Section 3 of this manual.
Delay Turning Headlights Off
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press
and release the RESET button until 0, 30, 60, or 90
appears.
Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter. To
make your selection, press and release the RESET button
until OFF, 30 sec., 60 sec., or 90 sec. appears.
Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, hands–free system (if equipped), DVD
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned off. Opening a vehicle
door will cancel this feature. To make your selection,
press and release the RESET button until Off, 45 sec., 5
min., or 10 min. appears.
250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Rear Park Assist System — If Equipped
When ENABLE is selected, the Rear ParkAssist System is
activated. When DISABLE is selected, the System is
deactivated and, the instrument cluster will display the
9PARK ASSIST DISABLED9 message.
Display Units of Measure in
The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if
equipped) can be changed between English and Metric
units of measure. To make your selection, press and
release the RESET button until US or METRIC appears.
RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION
RADIO BROADCAST SIGNALS
Your radio will provide excellent reception under most
operating conditions. Like any system, however, car
radios have performance limitations, due to mobile op-
eration and natural phenomena, which might lead you to
believe your sound system is malfunctioning. To help
you understand and save you concern about these “ap-
parent” malfunctions, you must understand a point or
two about the transmission and reception of radio sig-
nals.
Two Types of Signals
There are two basic types of radio signals:
1. AM or Amplitude Modulation, in which the transmit-
ted sound causes the amplitude, or height, of the radio
waves to vary.
2. FM or Frequency Modulation, in which the frequency
of the wave is varied to carry the sound.
AM Reception
AM sound is based on wave amplitude, so AM reception
can be disrupted by such things as lightning, power lines
and neon signs.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251
4
FM Reception
Because FM transmission is based on frequency varia-
tions, interference that consists of amplitude variations
can be filtered out, leaving the reception relatively clear,
which is the major feature of FM radio.
NOTE: The radio, steering wheel radio controls (if
equipped), and six-disc CD/DVD changer (if equipped)
will remain active for up to 90 seconds after the ignition
switch has been turned OFF, depending upon the EVIC,
Accessory Delay setting. Opening a vehicle front door
will cancel this feature.
Electrical Disturbances
Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during
transmission. They mainly affect the wave amplitude,
and thus remain a part of the AM reception. They
interfere very little with the frequency variations that
carry the FM signal.
SALES CODE REQ — AM/FM STEREO RADIO
AND 6–DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (MP3/WMA AUX
JACK)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of your radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the On/Volume control knob to turn on the radio.
Press the control knob a second time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
On/Volume control knob to the right increases the vol-
ume and to the left decreases it.
252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station, in AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press the SCAN button a second time.
Voice Recognition Button (UConnectt Hands-Free
Phone) — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Hands-Free Phone
(UConnectt) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-Free
Communication (UConnectt)” in Section 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
UConnect” message will display on the radio screen.
Phone Button (UConnectt Hands-Free Phone) — If
Equipped
Press this button to operate the Hands-Free Phone
(UConnectt) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-Free
Communication (UConnectt)” in Section 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
UConnect” message will display on the radio screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253
4
TIME Button
Press the TIME button and the time of day will display. In
AM or FM mode, pressing the TIME button will switch
between the time and frequency displays.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune/Scroll
control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side Tune/
Scroll control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will
begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune/Scroll
control knob. Press the Tune/Scroll control knob to save
the time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button
and selecting the “SET HOME CLOCK” entry. Once in
this display follow the above procedure, starting at Step
2.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in AM, FM
or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob clockwise to
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob and BASS will
display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob to the right or
left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a second time
and MID will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob
to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid-range
tones.
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a third time and
TREBLE will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob
to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones.
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a fourth time
and BALANCE will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control
knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the
right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a fifth time and
FADE will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob to
the left or right to adjust the sound level between the
front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob again to exit
setting tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the Tune/Scroll control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255
4
Program Type
16-Digit Character
Display
No program type or
undefined
None
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Classical Classicl
Classic Rock Cls Rock
College College
Country Country
Foreign Language Language
Information Inform
Jazz Jazz
News News
Nostalgia Nostalga
Oldies Oldies
Personality Persnlty
Public Public
Program Type
16-Digit Character
Display
Rhythm and Blues R & B
Religious Music Rel Musc
Religious Talk Rel Talk
Rock Rock
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
Top 40 Top 40
Weather Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
NOTE: Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob to scroll
through the entries. Push the AUDIO/SELECT button to
select an entry and make changes.
•
DVD Enter - When the disc is in DVD Menu mode,
selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current
highlighted selection. Use the remote control to scroll
up and down the menu (if equipped).
•
DISC Play/Pause - You can toggle between
playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by
pushing the SELECT button (if equipped).
•
DVD Play Options - Selecting the DVD Play Options
will display the following:
•
Subtitle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch
subtitles to different subtitle languages that are
available on the disc (if equipped).
•
Audio Stream – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will
switch to different audio languages (if supported on
the disc) (if equipped).
•
Angle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change
the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc (if
equipped).
NOTE: The available selections for each of the above
entries varies depending upon the disc.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257
4
NOTE: These selections can only be made while playing
a DVD.
•
VESt Power - Allows you to turn VESt on and off (if
equipped).
•
VESt Lock - Locks out rear VESt remote controls (if
equipped).
•
VESt CH1/CH2 - Allows the user to change the mode
of either the IR1 or IR2, wireless headphones by
pressing the AUDIO/SELECT button (if equipped).
•
Set Home Clock - Pressing the SELECT button allows
you to set the clock. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob
to adjust the hours and then press and turn the
Tune/Scroll control knob to adjust the minutes. Press
the Tune/Scroll control knob again to save changes.
•
Player Defaults - Selecting this item will allow the
user to scroll through the following items, and set
defaults according to customer preference.
Menu Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the
default startup DVD menu language (effective only if
language supported by disc). If you want to select a
language not listed, then scroll down and select 9other.9
Enter the four-digit country code using the Tune/Scroll
control knob to scroll up and down to select the number
and then push to select.
Audio Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting 9other.9 Enter the country code using
the Tune/Scroll control knob to scroll up and down to
select the number and then push to select.
258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Subtitle Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting 9other.9 Enter the country code using
the Tune/Scroll control knob to scroll up and down to
select the number and then push to select.
Subtitles — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle
Off or On.
Audio DRC — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio
dynamic range. The default is set to 9High,9 and under
this setting, dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the
setting is 9Normal.9
Aspect Ratio — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide
screen, pan scan, and letter box.
AutoPlay — If Equipped
When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted, it will
bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the
movie. In some rare cases, the DVD player may not
auto-play the main title. In such cases, use the MENU
button on the remote control to select desired title to play.
NOTE: The user will have to set these defaults before
loading a disc. If changes are made to these settings after
a disc is loaded, changes will not be effective. Also, the
defaults are effective only if the disc supports the
customer-preferred settings.
AM and FM Buttons
Press the buttons to select AM or FM Modes.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259
4
SET Button — To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
ton, the station will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM,
and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and
MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO)
The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by
geographic region. These region codes must match in
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD
disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD
player, it will not play the disc. Customers may take their
vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code
of the player a maximum of five times.
260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
The radio may shut down during extremely hot
conditions. When this occurs, the radio will indicate
“Disc Hot” and shut off until a safe temperature is
reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the
optics of the DVD player and other radio internal
components.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
LOAD Button — Loading Compact Disc(s)
Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the
corresponding number (1-6) where the CD is being
loaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and
prompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays
9INSERT DISC,9 insert the CD into the player.
Radio display will show 9LOADING DISC9 when the disc
is loading and “READING DISC” when the radio is
reading the disc.
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs only.
The use of other sized discs may damage the CD
player mechanism.
Eject Button — Ejecting Compact Disc(s)
Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton
with the corresponding number (1-6) where the
CD was loaded and the disc will unload and
move to the entrance for easy removal. Radio
display will show 9EJECTING DISC9 when the disc is
being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261
4
Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all
CDs will be ejected from the radio.
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
SEEK Button (CD MODE)
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in
CD, MP3/MWA modes.
SCAN Button (CD MODE)
Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
TIME Button (CD MODE)
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF (CD MODE)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Rewind) button
works in a similar manner.
AM or FM Button (CD MODE)
Switches the radio to the Radio mode.
Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files
The radio can play MP3/WMAfiles; however, acceptable
MP3/WMAfile recording media and formats are limited.
When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to the
following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3/WMA file recording media supported by the
radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3,WMA, DVD Video,
DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, and CDDA+MP3.
262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of directory levels: 8
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders: 100
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator 9.9 and a three-
character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator 9.9 and a three-
character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/
WMA files). Discs created with an option such as 9keep
disc open after writing9 are most likely multisession
discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/
WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times.
If a disc contains multi-formats, such as CD audio and
MP3/WMA tracks, the radio will only play the MP3/
WMA tracks on that disc.
Supported MP3/WMA File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3/WMA
extension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA files
named with the *.MP3/WMA extension may cause play-
back problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file
as an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263
4
When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audio
data to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and sampling
frequencies in the following table are supported. In
addition, Variable Bit Rates (VBR) are also supported.
The majority of MP3/WMAfiles use a 44.1 kHz sampling
rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.
MP3 File Format
MPEG
Specification
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
WMA File Format
WMA
Specification
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
WMA 44.1 and 48
48, 64, 96, 128,
160, 192 VBR
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for ID3 version 1 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3/WMA Files
When a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded,
the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3/WMA files.
264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may be
affected by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
LIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the Tune/Scroll control knob. Selecting a folder
by pressing the Tune/Scroll control knob will begin
playing the files contained in that folder (or the next
folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to 9elapsed
time9 priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and radio will display song titles for each file.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265
4
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to 9elapsed time9 display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3/WMA player, cassette player, or microphone and
utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source
and play through the vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
down.
SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the TIME button to change the display from
elapsed playing time to time of day. The time of day will
display for five seconds.
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition
System (VR) (If Equipped)
For the radio, refer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” in
Section 3.
For UConnectt “Voice Recognition System (VR)” refer to
“Hands-Free Communication (UConnectt)” in Section 3.
Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone
(UConnectt) — If Equipped
Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnectt)” in
Section 3.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Satellite Radio” in this section.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VESt) (If Equipped)
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VESt)
Guide.”
Dolbyt
Manufactured under license from Dolbyt Laboratories.
9Dolbyt9 and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolbyt Laboratories.
Macrovision
This product incorporates copyright protection technol-
ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellec-
tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only,
unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited
DTS™
9DTS™9 and 9DTS™ 2.09 are trademarks of Digital The-
ater Systems, Inc.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267
4
SALES CODE RES — AM/FM STEREO RADIO
WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of your radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the On/Volume control knob to turn on the radio.
Push the On/Volume control knob a second time to turn
off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
On/Volume control knob to the right increases the vol-
ume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
RES Radio
(Non-Satellite Model Shown - With Satellite Similar)
268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station in AM or FM frequencies,
pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before
continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the
SCAN button a second time.
Voice Recognition System (Radio) — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” in Section 3.
Voice Recognition Button (UConnectt Hands-Free
Phone) — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Hands-Free Phone
(UConnectt) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-Free
Communication (UConnectt)” in Section 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
UConnect” message will display on the radio screen.
Phone Button (UConnectt Hands-Free Phone) — If
Equipped
Press this button to operate the Hands-Free Phone
(UConnectt) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-Free
Communication (UConnectt)” in Section 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
UConnect” message will display on the radio screen.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button and the time of day will display. In
AM or FM mode, pressing the TIME button will switch
between the time and frequency displays.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button, until the hours blink.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269
4
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune/Scroll
control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side Tune/
Scroll control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will
begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune/Scroll
control knob. Press the Tune/Scroll control knob to save
time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
SETUP button, use the Tune/Scroll control to select SET
CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure, starting at
Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio,
press the SETUP button and then follow the above
procedure, starting at Step 2.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob clockwise to
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob and BASS will
display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob to the right or
left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a second time
and MID will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob
to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid-range
tones.
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a third time and
TREBLE will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob
to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones.
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a fourth time
and BALANCE will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control
knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the
right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a fifth time and
FADE will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob to
the left or right to adjust the sound level between the
front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob again to exit
setting tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the Tune/Scroll control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
16-Digit Character
Display
No program type or un-
defined
None
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Classical Classicl
Classic Rock Cls Rock
College College
Country Country
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271
4
Program Type
16-Digit Character
Display
Foreign Language Language
Information Inform
Jazz Jazz
News News
Nostalgia Nostalga
Oldies Oldies
Personality Persnlty
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues R & B
Religious Music Rel Musc
Religious Talk Rel Talk
Rock Rock
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues SoftR&B
Program Type
16-Digit Character
Display
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
Top 40 Top 40
Weather Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
•
Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
you to set the clock. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob
to adjust the hours and then press and turn the
Tune/Scroll control knob to adjust the minutes. Press
the Tune/Scroll control knob again to save changes.
AM and FM Buttons
Press the buttons to select AM or FM modes.
SET Button — To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
ton, the station will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM
stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. The sta-
tions stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing
the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273
4
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions - CD MODE for CD and
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
NOTE: This radio is capable of playing compact discs
(CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable com-
pact discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the disc number, the track number, and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of
track 1.
274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
•
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
•
Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
•
RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
•
Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD, MP3 modes.
SCAN Button
Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275
4
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Press the RW button to stop the CD at the beginning of
the current CD track/title.
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
AM or FM Button
Switches theAM or FM radio to the opposite radio mode.
RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator 9.9 and a three-
character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator 9.9 and a three-
character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as 9keep disc open after
writing9 are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277
4
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
MPEG
Specification
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the Tune/Scroll control knob. Selecting a folder
by pressing the Tune/Scroll control knob will begin
playing the files contained in that folder (or the next
folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to 9elapsed
time9 priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to 9elapsed time9 display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279
4
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).
Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone
(UConnectt) (If Equipped)
Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnectt)” in
Section 3.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Satellite Radio” in this section.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES)t (If Equipped)
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VES)t
Guide.”
SALES CODE REN — MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
of the unit’s faceplate.
The REN Multimedia system contains a radio, CD/DVD
player, USB port, a 20-gigabyte hard drive (HDD), and a
“JukeBox” (virtual CD changer). Sirius Satellite Radio is
optional. The 6.5 in (16.5 cm) touch screen allows for easy
menu selection.
A 20-gigabyte HDD allows uploads of music and photos
from CDs or through the USB port. The Gracenote
database finds the artist, track, and title for the music.
An auxiliary input jack permits passengers to listen to a
portable MP3 player through the vehicle’s speakers. For
vehicles equipped with the Vehicle Entertainment System
(VES)t, separate audio outputs allow passengers to listen
to the vehicle speakers while different audio tracks play
280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
through the system’s wireless headphones. This means
rear seat passengers can watch a DVD on the optional
rear seat entertainment system, while the driver and
front-seat passenger listen to the radio.
Other special features include direct tune, music type
selections, easy store presets, backup camera display for
vehicles equipped with a backup camera, and on some
models, a dual display screen operation. Refer to your
radio-specific user’s manual for detailed operating in-
structions.
Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio (If
Equipped)
Refer to your Radio-specific user’s manual for detailed
operating instructions.
Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition
System (VR) (If Equipped)
For the radio, refer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” in
Section 3.
For Hands Free Phone Communication (UConnectt)
“Voice Recognition System (VR),” refer to “Hands-Free
Communication (UConnectt)” in Section 3.
Operating Instructions — Hands-Free
Communication (UConnectT) (If Equipped)
Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnectt)” in
Section 3.
Clock Setting Procedure
Setting the Clock
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281
4
3. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the
word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is dis-
played. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing down-
ward is displayed.
4. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where
the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is
displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the
screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing
downward is displayed.
5. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where
the word “Save” is displayed.
Changing Daylight Savings Time
When selected, this feature will display the time of day in
daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the
current setting:
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the
screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are dis-
played to change the current setting.
Show Time if Radio is Off
When selected, this feature will display the time of day
on the touch screen when the multimedia system is
turned off. Proceed as follows to change the current
setting:
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”
282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is
Off” are displayed to change the current setting.
Changing the Time Zone
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are
displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on
the screen.
4. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your
selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you
want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
5. Touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed.
SALES CODE RER — MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
of the unit’s faceplate.
The RER Multimedia system contains a radio, Sirius
Satellite Radio player, navigation system, CD/DVD
player, USB port, 20-gigabyte hard drive (HDD), and the
UConnectt Hands-Free Bluetootht cellular system.
NOTE: If your vehicle is not equipped with UConnectt,
the unit will respond with a “Not Equipped With
UConnectt” message when selecting controls related to
this feature.
A 6.5 in (16.5 cm) touch screen allows easy menu selec-
tion, while the Advanced Voice Dialog System recognizes
more than 1,000 words for audio, navigation, entertain-
ment, and hands-free mobile phone use.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283
4
The satellite navigation capability combines a Global-
Positioning System (GPS)-based navigation system with
an integrated color screen to provide maps, turn identi-
fication, selection menus, and instructions for selecting a
variety of destinations and routes.
A shared HDD for the navigation system, the database,
and other radio features allows uploads of music and
photos from CDs or through the USB port. The Gracenote
database finds the artist, track, and title for the music.
An auxiliary input jack permits passengers to listen to a
portable MP3 player through the vehicle’s speakers. For
vehicles equipped with the Vehicle Entertainment System
(VES)t, separate audio outputs allow passengers to listen
to the vehicle speakers while different audio tracks play
through the system’s wireless headphones. This means
rear-seat passengers can watch a DVD on the optional
rear-seat entertainment system while the driver and
front-seat passenger listen to the radio.
Other special features include direct tune, music type
selections, traffic messaging (optional), easy store presets,
parental lockout for VESt (if equipped), backup camera
display for vehicles equipped with a backup camera, and
on some models, a dual display screen operation. Refer to
your “Navigation User’s Manual” for detailed operating
instructions.
Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio
Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for detailed
operating instructions.
Operating Instructions — Hands-Free
Communication (UConnectT) (If Equipped)
Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for detailed
operating instructions.
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Clock Setting Procedure
The GPS receiver in this system is synchronized to the
time data being transmitted by the GPS satellites. The
satellites’ clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is
the worldwide standard for time. This makes the sys-
tem’s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone
and daylight savings information is set.
Changing the Time Zone
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen. If the words
“Time: GPS Time” are displayed at the top of the screen,
proceed to Step 4. Otherwise, proceed to Step 3.
3. If the words “Time: User Clock” are displayed at the
top of the screen, touch the bottom of the screen where
the words “User Clock” are displayed. The GPS time
setting menu will appear on the screen.
4. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are
displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on
the screen.
5. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your
selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you
want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
Changing Daylight Savings Time
When selected, this feature will display the time of day in
daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the
current setting:
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
4
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the
screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are dis-
played to change the current setting.
Setting the User Clock
If you wish to set the clock to a time different from the
system clock, you can manually adjust the time by
performing the following:
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen. If the words
“Time: User Clock” are displayed at the top of the screen,
proceed to Step 4. Otherwise, proceed to Step 3.
3. If the words “Time: GPS Time” are displayed at the top
of the screen, touch the bottom of the screen where the
words “GPS Time” are displayed. The user clock time
setting menu will appear on the screen.
4. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the
word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is dis-
played. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing down-
ward is displayed.
5. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where
the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is
displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the
screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing
downward is displayed.
6. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where
the word “Save” is displayed.
Show Time if Radio is Off
When selected, this feature will display the time of day
on the touch screen when the system is turned off.
Proceed as follows to change the current setting:
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”
Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is
Off” are displayed to change the current setting.
SATELLITE RADIO — IF EQUIPPED
(REN/REQ/RER/RES/REU RADIOS ONLY)
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast-
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a wel-
come kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account at no addi-
tional charge. For further information, call the toll-free
number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site at
www.sirius.com, or at www.siriuscanada.ca for Cana-
dian residents.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when
calling:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
4
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access With REQ/RES Radios
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-
tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the Tune/Scroll control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the Tune/Scroll control knob and the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
ESN/SID Access With REN/RER Radios
While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio
faceplate.
Next, touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen.
All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display.
ESN/SID Access With REU Radio
While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio
faceplate.
Next, turn the knob surrounding the joystick in the center
of the radio to scroll to Subscription, and then press and
release the joystick. All of the ESNs that apply to your
vehicle will display.
Selecting Satellite Mode
Press the SAT button until 9SAT9 appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to
the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna (if equipped).
Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the
antenna will cause decreased performance. Larger lug-
gage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward
as possible, within the loading design of the rack. Do not
place items directly on or above the antenna.
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons:
•
The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
•
Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
•
Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
•
Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con-
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
INFO Button — Except REU Radio
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa-
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail-
able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
4
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
to normal display).
INFO Button — REU Radio
Pressing the INFO button will display information about
Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if available). Pressing
the INFO button again will close the INFO screen.
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob clockwise to
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button — Except REU Radio
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the Tune/Scroll control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
type.
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button — REU Radio
Pressing this button provides a MUSIC TYPES list from
which you can make a selection. Once a selection is
made, you can seek up, or down, or scan the channels
and the radio will tune to the next station matching the
selected format. There is no time-out for this screen.
290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button again will close the
MUSIC TYPE screen. Once closed, seek up, seek down,
and scan will no longer be based on your selection.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
•
Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Sirius subscription.
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291
4
Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnectt)” in
Section 3.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VEST) (If Equipped)
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VESt)
Guide.”
UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE (UCI) — IF
EQUIPPED
NOTE: This section is for sales code RES/REL and
REQ/RET radios only with UConnectt. For sales code
REN/REZ touch screen radio and REU/REX/RE1 radio,
refer to the separate User’s Manual.
This feature allows you to plug an iPodt mobile digital
device into the vehicle’s sound system through a connec-
tor (UCI connector) using an optional connection cable
(available through MOPARt). See your authorized dealer
for details.
Using this feature,
•
the iPodt audio can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing metadata (Track Title, Artist, Al-
bum, etc.) information display on radio.
•
the iPodt can be controlled using the radio buttons to
Play, Browse and List the iPodt contents.
•
the iPodt battery charges when plugged into the UCI
connector.
292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Connecting The iPodT Device
Use the optional connection cable to connect an iPodt to
the vehicle’s UCI connector (which is located in the glove
box or center console on some vehicles. This location may
vary with vehicle). Once the iPodt is connected and
synchronized to the vehicle system (this may take a few
seconds to connect), the vehicle brand logo appears on
the iPodt display, and it starts charging and is ready for
use by pressing radio switches as described below.
Controlling The iPodT Using Radio Buttons
To get into the UCI (iPodt) mode and access a connected
iPodt, press the AUX button on the radio faceplate. Once
in the UCI (iPodt) mode, the iPodt audio track (if
available from iPodt) will start playing over the vehicle
audio system.
Play Mode
When switched to UCI mode the iPodt will be in Play
mode. In Play mode, you may use the following buttons
on the radio faceplate to control the iPodt and display
data:
Tune/Scroll Knob
Use the Tune/Scroll knob to go to the next or previous
track.
The Tune/Scroll knob functions similar to the scroll
wheel on the iPodt mobile digital device.
Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click while playing
a track skips to the next track.
Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one click
during the first two seconds of the track will jump to the
previous track in the list and turning this button at any
other time in the track will jump to the beginning of the
current track.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293
4
RW (Rewind) Button
Press and hold the RW button to move backward in the
current track. Holding the RW button long enough will
take you back to the beginning of the current track.
Pressing and releasing the RW button will go back five
seconds of the current track.
FF (Fast Forward) Button
Press and hold the FF button to move forward in the
current track.
Pressing and releasing the FF button will go forward five
seconds of the current track.
SEEK Buttons
Use the SEEK buttons to move to the previous or the next
track.
If the left (down) button is pressed during the first two
seconds of the current track, it will go back to the
previous track in the list; if you press this button at any
other time in the current track it will go back to the
beginning of the track.
If the right (up) button is pressed during Play mode, it
will go to the next track in the list.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button while a track is playing to see the
information (Track Title, Artist, Album, etc.) for that
track. Each press of the INFO button will take you to the
next screen of data for that track. Once you have seen all
of the screens, the last press of the INFO button will take
you back to the Play mode screen on the radio.
REPEAT Button
Press the REPEAT button to repeat the current playing
track.
294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button will play the first five seconds
of each track in the current list and then forward to the
next song. To stop the SCAN mode and start playing the
desired track, press the SCAN button again.
During the SCAN mode, you can also press the SEEK
button to the left or right to go to the previous or next
tracks.
RND (Random) Button (RES/REL Radios Only)
Pressing the RND button will switch between the shuffle
on and shuffle off modes of the iPodt. If the RND icon is
showing on the radio display then the Shuffle mode is on.
List or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pressing any of the following buttons
will take you to List mode. List mode enables you to
scroll through the list of menus and tracks on the iPodt
device.
Tune/Scroll Knob
In the List mode, the Tune/Scroll knob functions in a
similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPodt.
Turning the Tune/Scroll knob clockwise (forward) and
counterclockwise (backward) scrolls through lists, dis-
playing the track detail on the radio display. Once you
have the track to be played highlighted on the radio
display, press the Tune/Scroll knob to select and start
playing the track. By turning the Tune/Scroll knob fast,
you can jump through the list faster. During fast scroll,
you may notice a slight delay in updating the informa-
tion on the radio display.
During all List modes, the iPodt will display all lists in
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track you wish to select is
at the bottom of the list, you just turn the Tune/Scroll
knob backward (counterclockwise) to get to the track
faster.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295
4
Radio Preset Buttons
In the List mode, the radio preset buttons are used as
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPodt device.
•
1 – Playlists
•
2 – Artists
•
3 – Albums
•
4 – Genres
•
5 - Audiobooks
•
6 – Podcasts
After pressing a preset button, you will see the list you
are in on the top line and the first item in that list on the
second line.
To exit the List mode without selecting a track, press the
same preset button again to go back to Play mode.
LIST Button
Pressing the LIST button will take to the top level menu
of the iPodt. This takes you to the same top level menu
as on your iPodt. Turn the Tune/Scroll knob to list the
top menu item you wish to select and then press the
Tune/Scroll knob. This will take you to the next sub
menu list item of the iPodt and you can follow the same
steps to go to the desired track in that list. Not all iPodt
sub menu levels are available on this system.
MUSIC TYPE Button
The MUSIC TYPE button is another shortcut button to
the genre listing on your iPodt.
296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SIRIUS BACKSEAT TV™ — IF EQUIPPED
Satellite video uses direct satellite receiver broadcasting
technology to provide streaming video coast to coast. The
subscription service provider is SIRIUS Satellite Radio.
SIRIUS Backseat TV™ offers three video channels for
family entertainment, directly from its satellites and
broadcasting studios.
NOTE: SIRIUS service is not available in Hawaii and
has limited coverage in Alaska.
Refer to your Video Entertainment System (VES)t, RER
Navigation or REN Multimedia User Manuals for de-
tailed operating instructions.
VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VEST)—IF
EQUIPPED
The optional VESt (Video Entertainment System) is
available with:
•
One or two video screens
•
Additional single-disc DVD player with two—screen
system
•
Battery-powered two channel remote control
•
Two remote headphones
•
Integrated remote storage in either screen location
•
Three different medias can be played simultaneously
(Cabin speakers and Headphone Channels 1 and 2)
•
Easy menu driven functions on touch screen radios
•
Video and audio input jacks available in rear seating
area
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297
4
•
Nine different medias to choose from in each screen
(AM, FM, Sirius Radio, DVD1, DVD2, Hard Drive
Jukebox, AUX in radio, AUX1, AUX2).
The LCD screen(s) are located in the overhead compart-
ment console.
NOTE: Refer to your VESt User’s Manual for detailed
operating instructions.
Overhead Video Screens
VESt Remote Control Location
298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being ON in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel at the 3 and 9 O’clock
positions.
The right-hand rocker switch has a push button in the
center and controls the volume and mode of the sound
system. Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase
the volume. Pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will
decrease the volume. Pressing the center button changes
the operation of the radio from AM to FM or Tape to CD
mode depending on which radio is in the vehicle.
The left-hand rocker switch has a push button in the
center. The function of the left-hand switch is different
depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left hand rocker switch
operation in each mode:
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left hand switch
will tune to the next pre-set station that you have
programmed in the radio pre-set push-button.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299
4
CD Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.
The button in the center of the left-hand switch has no
function in this mode.
CD/DVD MAINTENANCE
To keep the CD/DVD discs in good condition, take the
following precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If a disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper, paper CD labels, or tape to the
disc; avoid scratching a disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, cleaners,
or antistatic sprays.
5. Store a disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose a disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store a disc where temperatures may become
too high.
8. Do not play discs that are small in size or have
irregular shapes.
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the
temperature, amount, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
instrument panel, below the radio.
MANUAL HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR
CONDITIONING (HVAC) SYSTEM
The controls for the manual HVAC system in this vehicle
consist of a series of outer rotary dials inner push knobs.
These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired
interior conditions.
Manual HVAC Controls
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
4
Front Blower Control
There are four blower speeds. Use this
control to regulate the amount of air
forced through the system in any
mode you select. The blower speed
increases as you move the control
clockwise from the off position.
Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate the tem-
perature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. Rotate the knob coun-
terclockwise from top center into the
blue area of the scale indicates cooler
temperatures while rotating the knob
clockwise into the red area indicates
warmer temperatures.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C con-
denser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumu-
lation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
Mode Control (Air Direction)
Mode control allows you to choose
from several patterns of air distribu-
tion. You can select either a primary
mode, as identified by the symbols, or
a blend of two of these modes. The
closer the control is to a particular
mode, the more air distribution you
receive from that mode.
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PANEL Mode
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.
BI-LEVEL Mode
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature (in any
conditions other than full cold or full hot), between the
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
FLOOR Mode
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount through the defrost and side window
demist outlets.
MIX Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
DEFROST Mode
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use DEFROST mode with
maximum blower and temperature settings for best
windshield and side window defrosting.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in
MIX and DEFROST, or a blend of these modes even if the
A/C SNOWFLAKE button is not pressed. This dehu-
midifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve
fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
4
RECIRCULATION Control
Press this button to choose
between outside air intake or
recirculation of the air inside
the vehicle. A lamp will illu-
minate when you are in RE-
CIRCULATION mode. Only
use the RECIRCULATION
mode to temporarily block
out any outside odors, smoke,
or dust and to cool the inte-
rior rapidly upon initial start up in very hot or humid
weather.
NOTE:
•
Continuous use of the RECIRCULATION mode may
make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may
occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
•
In cold or damp weather, the use of the RECIRCULA-
TION mode will cause windows to fog on the inside
because of moisture build-up inside the vehicle. For
maximum defogging, select the Outside Air position.
•
In order to prevent fogging, when the recirculation
button is pressed and the mode control is set to
PANEL the A/C will engage automatically.
•
The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb-
ing the mode control selection.
Air Outlets
The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can
be adjusted for direction and turned on or off to control
airflow.
NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center
instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear
seat passengers.
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ECONOMY Mode
If ECONOMY mode is desired, press the A/C button to
turn off the indicator light and the A/C compressor.
Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired tem-
perature.
Air Conditioning Operation
Push on this button to engage
the Air Conditioning. A light
will illuminate when the A/C
System is engaged
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage
until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.
MAX A/C
For maximum cooling use the A/C and RECIRCULA-
TION mode buttons at the same time.
Three Zone Basic Temperature Control — If
Equipped
With the Three Zone Basic Temperature Control System,
each front seat occupant can independently control the
Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) op-
erations coming from the outlets on their side of the
vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
4
The Three Zone Basic Temperature Control bottom panel
controls rear Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning
(HVAC) operations.
Three Zone Temperature Control
1 — Left Temp 7 — Right Temp
2 — PANEL 8 — Rear DEFROST
3 — BI-LEVEL 9 — RECIRCULATE
4 — BLOWER 10 — Front DEFROST
5 — FLOOR 11 — A/C
6 — MIX
Front Lower Three Zone Temperature Control Features
1 — Left Heated Seat 3 — Rear Temp
2 — Rear Blower 4 — Right Heated Seat
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The primary control for the rear blower is on the front
climate control unit located on the instrument panel.
The front climate control unit has five positions, off, rear,
and a range of blower speeds. Only when the primary
control for the rear blower is in the REAR position do the
second seat occupants have control of the rear blower
speed.
REAR MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL ZONE — IF
EQUIPPED
The Rear Manual Climate Control Zone system has floor
air outlets at the rear of the right side sliding door and
overhead outlets at each outboard rear seating position.
The unit provides warm or cool air through the floor and
upper outlets.
The rear blower and temperature controls for the rear
seat passengers are located in the headliner near the
center of the vehicle.
Rear Blower Control
The primary control for the rear blower is on the front
climate control unit located on the instrument panel.
Rear HVAC Manual Controls
1 — Blower 3 — Rear HVAC Lock
2 — Temperature 4 — MODE Select
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
4
Only when the front control for the rear blower is in the
RR position do the second seat occupants have control of
the rear blower speed.
The rear blower control, located in the rear overhead
console has an off position and a range of blower speeds.
This allows the second seat occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Manual Rear Zone Climate
Control system through an intake grille located in the
passenger side trim panel behind the third seat. The
heater outlets are located in the passenger side trim
panel just behind the sliding door. Do not block or
place objects directly in front of the inlet grille or
heater outlets. The electrical system could overload
causing damage to the blower motor.
Rear Temperature Control
When the blower knob on the front climate control unit is
set to any position other than RR , the rear temperature
selection follows the setting of the rear temperature
control knob on the front climate control unit. The rear
mode selection follows the setting of the rear mode
control knob.
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,
rotate the temperature control knob counterclockwise for
cold and clockwise for heated air.
When rear controls are locked by the front system, the
lock symbol on the temperature knob is illuminated and
the rear overhead adjustments are ignored.
The rear airflow modes will mirror the front unit opera-
tion. Rear PANEL mode is automatically selected when
the front control is in the PANEL mode. When the front
unit is in BI-LEVEL mode, airflow will be emitted from
both the upper and lower rear outlets. When the front
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
control is in FLOOR, DEFROST, or MIX modes, airflow
will be directed out of the rear floor outlets.
Rear Mode Control
FLOOR Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
BI-LEVEL Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the
floor outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVEL
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head-
liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
HEADLINER Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of
these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct
the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one
side will shut off the airflow.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL (ATC) —
IF EQUIPPED
•
Front Three Zone ATC allows both the driver and front
occupant and rear seat occupants to select individual
comfort settings
•
Occupants in the vehicle select AUTO mode operation
and a comfort temperature setting, using rotary knobs
on the control unit.
•
The system provides set-and-forget operation for op-
timum comfort and convenience.
•
The system can be controlled manually if desired.
•
SYNC feature links the controls for all three zones,
allowing one comfort setting for the cabin, if desired.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
4
The Infrared Three-Zone ATC System automatically
maintains the interior comfort level desired by the driver
and all passengers. This is accomplished by an infrared
sensor, located in the forward overhead console. Based
on the sensor input, the system automatically adjusts the
air temperature, the airflow volume, and amount of
outside air recirculation. This maintains a comfortable
temperature even under changing conditions.
Front Upper ATC Panel
1 - Left On/Off 9 - Right On/Off
2 - Blower 10 - AUTO Temp
3 - Left Front Temp 11 - MODE
4 - Rear Blower/Temp 12 - Front DEFROST
5 - SYNC Indicator 13 - RECIRCULATE
6 - A/C Indicator 14 - Blower
7 - Right Front Temp 15 - SYNC
8 - MODE
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Below the automatic control, the system selects the
appropriate mode (airflow outlets) and fan speed.
Operation of the system is quite simple.
1. Press the AUTO button and the word AUTO will
illuminate in the front ATC display, along with three
temperatures for Driver’s, Passenger, and Rear seats. The
system will then automatically regulate the amount of
airflow.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain by adjusting the driver’s, passenger,
and rear seat rotary temperature knobs. Once the desired
temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and
automatically maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience
the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
Front Lower ATC Panel
1 - Blower 4 - Rear HVAC Lock
2 - Rear On/Off 5 - Rear DEFROST
3 - Rear Mode
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
4
NOTE:
•
It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
•
The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric by
selecting the US/M customer programmable feature.
Refer to the “Customer Programmable Features” in
Section 3 of this manual.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic
mode, during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain
on low and the DELAY symbol will appear in the front
ATC display until the engine warms up. The fan will
engage immediately if the DEFROST mode is selected or
by rotating the blower control to any fixed blower speed.
Manual Operation
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will
be turned off when the system is being used in the
manual mode.
NOTE: Each of these features operate independently
from each other. If any one feature is controlled manually,
the remaining features will continue to operate automati-
cally.
The left blower control knob can be set to any fixed
blower speed by pressing the upper front blower rocker
button. The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until
additional speeds are selected. This allows the front
occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the
vehicle and cancel the AUTO mode.
The operator can also select the direction of the selecting
one of the following positions.
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PANEL Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel.
Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the center
outlets down, will close off the airflow from the center
outlets. The thumbwheel next to the outboard outlets can
be rotated to regulate or shut off the airflow from these
outlets.
BI-LEVEL Mode
Air comes from both the instrument panel outlets,
floor outlets and defrost. A slight amount of air is
also directed through the side window demister outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVEL
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the panel
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
FLOOR Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of
air is directed through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
MIX Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or
snowy conditions. It allows you to stay comfortable
while keeping the windshield clear.
DEFROST Mode
Air comes from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. Use DEFROST mode with maxi-
mum blower and temperature settings for best wind-
shield and side window defrosting.
NOTE: While operating in the other modes, the system
will not automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or
ice on the windshield. DEFROST mode must be manually
selected to clear the windshield and side glass.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
4
The SNOWFLAKE mode or A/C button allows
the operator to manually activate or deactivate the
air conditioning system. When in SNOWFLAKE
mode the ATC display is on, cool, dehumidified air flows
through the air outlets. If ECONOMY mode is desired,
press the SNOWFLAKE button to turn off the SNOW-
FLAKE mode in the ATC display and deactivate the A/C
system. Note: If fog or mist appears on the windshield or
side glass, select DEFROST mode and increase blower
speed.
RECIRCULATION Control
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
pressing the RECIRCULATION mode control
button. RECIRCULATION mode should only be used
temporarily. The recirculation symbol will illuminate in
the display when this button is selected. Push the button
a second time to turn off the RECIRCULATION mode
LED and allow outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of the RECIRCULATION
mode may lead to excessive window fogging. The RE-
CIRCULATION mode is not allowed in the FLOOR, MIX
and DEFROST modes to improve window clearing op-
eration. Recirculation will be disabled automatically if
these modes are selected. Recirculation will be disabled
automatically if these modes are selected.
Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
The Rear ATC System has floor air outlets at the rear of
the right side sliding door and overhead outlets at each
outboard rear seating positions. The system provides
heated air through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified
air through the headliner outlets.
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The REAR SYSTEM control for the Rear ATC System is
on the front ATC control unit located on the instrument
panel.
Pressing the REAR LOCK button for the Rear ATC
System from the front ATC control unit, illuminates a
LOCK symbol in the rear display. The rear temperature
and air source are controlled from the front ATC control
unit.
Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear ATC
control when the REAR LOCK button is turned off.
The Rear ATC System is located in the headliner near the
center of the vehicle.
Rear ATC Control Features
1 - Blower 3 - Rear Lock
2 - Temperature 4 - MODE
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
4
Operation of the rear system is quite simple.
1. Press the REAR LOCK button on the front ATC control
unit. This turns off the REAR LOCK icon in the rear
temperature knob.
2. Rotate the Rear Blower, Rear Temperature and the
Rear Mode Control knobs to suit your comfort needs.
3. ATC is selected by adjusting the rear blower knob
counterclockwise to AUTO.
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the ATC
System will automatically achieve and maintain that
comfort level. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
NOTE:
•
It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
•
The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric by
selecting the US/M customer programmable feature.
Refer to ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
CENTER (EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED, Personal Settings
(Customer Programmable Features) in Section 4 of this
manual.
Rear Blower Control
The rear blower control knob can be manually set to off
or any fixed blower speed by rotating the knob from low
to high. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature
Control System through an intake grille located in
the passenger side trim panel behind the third seat.
The heater outlets are located in the passenger side
trim panel just behind the sliding door. Do not block
or place objects directly in front of the inlet grille or
heater outlets. The electrical system could overload
causing damage to the blower motor.
Rear Temperature Control
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,
rotate the temperature knob counterclockwise to lower
the temperature and clockwise to increase the tempera-
ture. The REAR temperature settings are displayed in the
front ATC control.
When rear controls are locked by the front system, the
LOCK symbol on the temperature knob is illuminated
and any rear overhead adjustments are ignored.
Rear Mode Control
AUTO Mode
The rear system automatically maintains the correct
mode and comfort level desired by the rear seat occu-
pants.
FLOOR Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
BI-LEVEL Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the
floor outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVEL
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head-
liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
4
HEADLINER Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of
these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct
the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one
side will shut off the airflow.
SUMMER OPERATION
The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. A 50% solution of ethylene
glycol antifreeze coolant in water is recommended. Refer
to section 7, “Maintenance Procedures”, of this manual
for proper coolant selection.
WINTER OPERATION
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is function-
ing properly and the proper amount, type, and concen-
tration of coolant is used. Refer to section 7,
“Maintenance Procedures”, of this manual for proper
coolant selection. Use of the air RECIRCULATION mode
during winter months is not recommended because it
may cause window fogging.
VACATION/STORAGE
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
WINDOW FOGGING
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild rainy
or humid weather. To clear the windows, select DE-
FROST or MIX mode and increase the front blower
speed. Do not use the RECIRCULATION mode without
A/C for long periods, as fogging may occur.
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
OUTSIDE AIR INTAKE
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they
enter the plenum they could plug the water drains. In
winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush and snow.
OPERATING TIPS
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
4
A/C AIR FILTER — IF EQUIPPED
On vehicles equipped with Automatic Temperature Con-
trol (ATC), the climate control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Refer to Section 7 “Air Conditioning”
for filter replacement instructions.
ELECTRIC REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER — IF
EQUIPPED
Press this button (located on your front climate
control) to turn on the rear window defroster and
the optional heated mirrors. A light will show that the
defroster is on. The defroster automatically turns off after
about ten minutes of operation, as long as the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
After the initial time interval has expired, if the rear
window defogger switch is pressed to the on position
again (during the same ignition cycle), the system will
automatically turn off after about five minutes.
NOTE: You may turn off the heated mirror feature at
anytime by pressing the rear window defogger switch a
second time.
CAUTION!
To avoid damaging the electrical conductors of the
rear window defroster, do not use scrapers, sharp
instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window.
Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm
water.
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
m Starting Procedures .....................324
▫ Automatic Transmission ................325
m Engine Block Heater — If Equipped .........327
m Automatic Transmission ..................328
▫ Brake/Transmission Interlock System .......328
▫ Four-Speed Or Six-Speed Automatic
Transmission ........................329
▫ Reset Mode - Electronic Transmission .......334
m Parking Brake .........................335
m Brake System ..........................337
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ............338
m Electronic Brake Control Systems ............340
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) ............340
m Power Steering ........................344
m Driving On Slippery Surfaces ..............345
▫ Acceleration .........................345
▫ Traction ............................346
m Driving Through Water ..................346
5
▫ Flowing/Rising Water ..................346
m Tire Safety Information ...................348
▫ Tire Markings ........................348
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ...........353
m Tires — General Information ...............357
▫ Tire Pressure .........................357
m Tire Chains ...........................367
m Snow Tires ...........................368
m Tire Rotation ..........................368
m Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ........369
▫ Basic TPMS Without EVIC — If Equipped ....371
▫ Premium TPMS With EVIC — If Equipped . . .373
m Fuel Requirements ......................377
▫ 3.3L & 3.8L Gasoline Engine ..............377
m Adding Fuel ..........................382
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ...............382
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ............384
m Flexible Fuel — 3.3L Engines Only ..........384
▫ E-85 General Information ................384
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) ....................385
▫ Fuel Requirements ....................386
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel
Vehicles (FFV) E-85 And Gasoline Vehicles . . .387
▫ Starting ............................387
▫ Cruising Range .......................387
▫ Replacement Parts .....................387
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Maintenance .........................388
m Vehicle Loading ........................388
▫ Vehicle Certification Label ...............389
m Trailer Towing .........................393
▫ Common Towing Definitions .............393
▫ Towing Tips .........................405
m Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . .407
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
5
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
NEVER leave unattended children alone in a vehicle.
Leaving children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
WARNING!
DO NOT leave animals or children inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Be sure to turn off the engine and remove the key
from the ignition switch if you want to rest or sleep
in your car. Accidents can be caused by inadvertently
moving the gear selection lever. Accidents can also be
caused by pressing the accelerator pedal. This may
cause excessive heat in the exhaust system, resulting
in overheating and vehicle fire, which may cause
serious or fatal injuries.
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
Automatic Transmission
The gear selector lever must be in the NEUTRAL or
PARK position before you can start the engine. Depress
the brake pedal before shifting into any driving gear.
Normal Starting (Above 32°F/0°C)
1. DO NOT depress the accelerator.
2. Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn the
ignition switch to the START position and release it as
soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will
continue to run, and it will disengage automatically
when the engine is running.
3. If the engine fails to start, the starter will disengage
automatically in 10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the
ignition switch to the OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds,
then repeat the normal starting procedure (Steps 1–3
above).
NOTE: This vehicle is equipped with a transmission
shift interlocking system. The brake pedal must be
depressed to shift out of PARK.
Extremely Cold Weather Starting — Below 220°F
(–29°C)
Follow the same instructions in the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
High Altitude Starting — Above 4,000 ft (1 219 m)
Follow the same instructions in the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
5
If The Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
•
NEVER pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
•
DO NOT attempt to push or tow your vehicle to
get it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once
the engine has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle.
•
If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to Section 6 of this manual for proper jump-
starting procedures and follow them carefully.
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” procedure, it may be flooded. Push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it
there while cranking the engine. This should clear any
excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, DO NOT crank the
engine for more than 15–second intervals at one time.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not
have enough power to continue running when the key is
released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the accel-
erator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the
accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running
smoothly.
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15–
second intervals of cranking with the accelerator pedal
held to the floor, the “Normal Starting” procedure should
be repeated.
After Starting
The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine
warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms engine coolant and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the
electrical cord to a standard 110-115 volt AC electrical
outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the driver’s side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap
that is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power
Module.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the electrical cord before
driving. Damage to the 110-115 volt electrical cord
could cause electrocution.
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
5
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
•
Shift the gear selector lever into PARK only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
•
Do not shift the gear selector lever from RE-
VERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL into any forward
gear when the engine is above idle speed.
•
Before shifting the gear selector lever into any
gear, make sure your foot is firmly on the brake
pedal.
NOTE: You MUST press and hold the brake pedal down
while shifting out of PARK.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift the gear selector lever out of
PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher
than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly
forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the
vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift
into gear when the engine is idling normally and
when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
Brake/Transmission Interlock System
This system holds the shift lever in the PARK position
when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. It also
prevents you, once the engine is started, from moving the
gear selector lever out of PARK and into any gear unless
the brake pedal is pressed. This system is active only
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
while the ignition switch is in the ON position. Always
press the brake pedal first before moving the gear selec-
tor lever out of PARK.
Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock System
For electrical system malfunctions, there is an override
for the interlock system. In order to override this system,
remove the cover located to the top right of the gear
selector lever in the instrument panel. The override can
be activated by pressing the white-colored tab, which can
be accessed through the hole in the instrument panel.
While the override is pressed, the gear selector lever can
be moved out of the PARK position without pressing the
brake pedal. After operation, return the cover to its
original position.
This system prevents the key from being removed unless
the gear selector lever is in PARK. It also prevents shifting
the gear selector lever out of PARK unless the key is in
the LOCK/OFF or ON positions.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and
stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain
service.
Four-Speed or Six-Speed Automatic
Transmission
The electronically controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
The transmission has only PRND shift positions. Down-
shifts are carried out by an Electronic Range Select (ERS)
by moving the lever—/+while in the DRIVE position,
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
5
the instrument cluster will display transmission gear
selection as 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 for six-speed and 4, 3, 2, 1 for
four-speed transmissions.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting the gear selector
lever from PARK or NEUTRAL positions into another
gear range.
PARK
Shifting the gear selector lever in PARK supplements the
parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine
can be started in this gear. Never attempt to use PARK
while vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when
leaving the vehicle in this gear.
When parking on a flat surface, place the shift lever in the
PARK position first, and then apply the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As
an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an
uphill grade.
WARNING!
Never use PARK position on an automatic transmis-
sion as a substitute for the parking brake. Always
apply parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible injury or
damage.
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, you should always
shift the gear selector lever into PARK, remove the
key from the ignition, and apply the parking brake.
Once the key is removed from the ignition, the
transmission gear selector lever is locked in the
PARK position, securing the vehicle against un-
wanted movement. Furthermore, you should never
leave unattended children or pets inside a vehicle.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission gear selector lever
into the PARK position:
•
When shifting the gear selector lever into PARK,
depress the button on the gear selector lever and
firmly move the lever all the way forward until it
stops.
•
Look at the shift indicator window on the console to
ensure gear selector lever is in the PARK position.
•
When engaged in PARK, you will not be able to move
the gear selector lever rearward without depressing
the gear selector lever button.
CAUTION!
Before moving the gear selector lever out of PARK,
you must turn the ignition from LOCK/OFF to ON so
the steering wheel and gear selector lever are re-
leased. Otherwise, damage to the steering column or
gear selector lever could result.
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
5
REVERSE
Use REVERSE for moving the vehicle rearward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL
Shift the gear selector lever into this gear only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop. The engine may be
started in this range.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have an accident.
DRIVE — Six-Speed Transmission
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts, downshifts,
and best fuel economy. However, use the Electronic
Range Select (ERS) mode by moving the lever—/+and
select the “5” range when frequent transmission shifting
occurs while using the DRIVE range, such as when
operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions,
(i.e., in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds or
while towing heavy trailers). Under these conditions,
using the “5” range will improve performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat build-up.
DRIVE — Four-Speed Transmission
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts, downshifts,
and best fuel economy. However, select the “3” range
when frequent transmission shifting occurs while using
the DRIVE range, such as when operating the vehicle
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
under heavy loading conditions, (i.e., in hilly terrain,
traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy
trailers). Under these conditions, using the “3” range will
improve performance and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat build-up.
CAUTION!
If the transmission operating temperature exceeds
acceptable limits, the vehicle computer will override
DRIVE and select “5” range (on six-speed transmis-
sions) or “3” range (on four-speed transmissions) by
changing shift points. This is done to prevent trans-
mission damage due to overheating.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows
you to move the gear selector lever to the left (-) or right
(+) when the gear selector lever is in the D (Drive)
position, this allows the selection of the desired top gear.
For example, if the driver shifts the transmission into 3rd
gear, the transmission will never shift above 3rd gear, but
can shift down to 2nd or 1st gear automatically, when
needed.
Switching from ERS to D-Mode (Drive) can be done at any
vehicle speed. To shift from “Drive” mode to “ERS” mode,
move gear selector lever to the left (-) once. The current gear
will be maintained as the top gear. To disable ERS, simply
press and hold the gear selector lever to the right (+) until
“D” is displayed in the instrument cluster odometer.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid causing an accident or
personal injury.
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
5
Odometer
Screen Display
12345 6D
Actual Gear(s)
Allowed —Six-
Speed Trans-
mission
1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-6 1-6
Actual Gear(s)
Allowed
—Four-Speed
Transmission
1 1-2 1-3 1-4 N/A N/A 1–4
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), simply press and hold the
gear selector lever to the left (-). The transmission will
shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be
slowed down.
Reset Mode - Electronic Transmission
The transmission is monitored electronically for abnor-
mal conditions. If a condition is detected that could cause
damage, the transmission automatically shifts into 2nd
gear (3rd gear for six-speed). The transmission remains in
2nd gear (3rd gear for six-speed) despite the forward gear
selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue
to operate. This Reset feature allows the vehicle to be
driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam-
aging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
4. Restart the engine.
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
5. Shift into the desired gear range and resume driving.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, it is
recommended that you visit an authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
PARKING BRAKE
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch ON, the brake light in the instrument cluster will
turn on.
NOTE: This light only shows that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied by depressing the pedal located at
the bottom left of the instrument panel and place the gear
selector lever in the PARK position. To release the park-
ing brake, depress the emergency break pedal a second
time and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage.
Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked and
the gear selector lever is in the PARK position. When
parking on a hill you should apply the parking brake
Parking Brake
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
5
before placing the gear selector lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the gear selector lever out of
PARK.
WARNING!
•
Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage
or injury. Also be certain to leave an automatic
transmission in PARK, a manual transmission in
REVERSE or first gear. Failure to do so may allow
the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.
•
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving, failure to do so can lead to brake
problems due to excessive heating of the rear
brakes.
WARNING!
NEVER leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle
When parking on a hill, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade, and away from the curb on an
uphill grade.
The parking brake should always be applied whenever
the driver is not in the vehicle.
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. However, there will
be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be
evident by increased pedal travel during application and
greater pedal force required to slow or stop the vehicle. In
addition, if the malfunction is caused by a leak in the
hydraulic system, the brake warning indicator will turn
on as the brake fluid level drops in the master cylinder.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for
example, repeated brake applications with the engine
off), the brakes will still function. The effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
WARNING!
•
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot rest-
ing or riding on the brake pedal can result in
abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive
lining wear, and possible brake damage. You
wouldn’t have your full braking capacity in an
emergency.
•
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is dan-
gerous. A significant decrease in braking perfor-
mance or vehicle stability during braking may
occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle or
will make your vehicle harder to control. You
could have an accident. Have the vehicle checked
immediately.
STARTING AND OPERATING 337
5
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake per-
formance under most braking conditions. The system
automatically “pumps” the brakes during severe braking
conditions to prevent wheel lock-up.
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can in-
clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
You may experience the following when the brake system
goes into Anti-lock:
•
The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop).
•
A clicking sound of solenoid valves.
•
Brake pedal pulsations.
•
A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
of the stop.
WARNING!
•
The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisti-
cated electronic equipment that may be suscep-
tible to interference caused by improperly in-
stalled or high output radio transmitting
equipment. This interference can cause possible
loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
•
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to an accident.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need
to slow down or stop.
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
The Anti-Lock Brake System cannot prevent acci-
dents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle too
closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
•
The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type, and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
Anti-Lock Brake Light
The ABS light monitors the Anti-Lock System.
The light will come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or comes on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not come on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
bulb repaired as soon as possible.
If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Light
remain on, the ABS and Electronic Brake Force Distribu-
tion (EBD) systems are not functioning. Immediate repair
STARTING AND OPERATING 339
5
to the ABS system is required. Consult with your autho-
rized dealer service center as soon as possible.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEMS
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that includes TCS (Traction Control
System), BAS (Brake Assist System) and ESP (Electronic
Stability Program). These systems complement the Anti-
Lock Brake System (ABS) by optimizing the vehicle
braking capability during emergency braking maneu-
vers.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to
a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
This feature remains active even if the ESP is in the
“Partial Off” mode.
The Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator
Light, located in the instrument cluster, starts
to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the
wheels begin to spin. This indicates that the
TCS is active. If the indicator light flashes during accel-
eration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions, and do not
switch off the ESP or TCS.
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
The TCS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded.
•
The TCS cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, or hydro-
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
•
The capabilities of a TCS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak-
ing pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer
desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
5
WARNING!
•
BAS (Brake Assist System) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevail-
ing road conditions.
•
BAS cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent
accidents.
•
The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESP cor-
rects for over/under steering of the vehicle by applying
the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counter-
acting the over/under steer condition. Engine power
may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the
desired path.
ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESP applies the brake of the appropri-
ate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
•
Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
•
Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
ESP ON
This is the normal operating mode for ESP on 2WD
vehicles. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESP system
will be in this mode. This mode should be used for most
driving situations. ESP should only be turned off for
specific reasons as noted below.
ESP Partial OFF
This mode is entered by momentarily depressing the ESP
OFF switch (located in the center switch bank, next to the
hazard flasher switch).
When in Partial OFF mode, the TCS portion of
ESP, except for the “limited slip” feature de-
scribed in the TCS section, has been disabled
and the ESP/TCS Indicator Light will be illu-
minated. All other stability features of the ESP function
normally. This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle
is in deep snow, sand or gravel conditions and more
wheel spin than ESP would normally allow is required to
gain traction. To turn ESP on again, momentarily depress
the ESP OFF switch. This will restore the normal ESP ON
mode of operation.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the Partial OFF
mode by pressing the ESP OFF switch. Once the situation
requiring ESP to be switched to the Partial OFF mode is
overcome, turn ESP back on by momentarily depressing
the ESP OFF switch. This may be done while the vehicle
is in motion.
ESP/BAS Warning Light
The malfunction indicator light for the ESP is
combined with BAS. The ESP/BAS Warning
light and the ESP/TCS Indicator Light in the
instrument cluster both come on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position. They should
go out with the engine running. If the ESP/BAS Warning
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
5
Light comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the
BAS system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles/
kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
•
The ESP/TCS Indicator Light and the ESP/BAS Warn-
ing Light come on momentarily each time the ignition
switch is turned ON.
•
Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESP System
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
•
The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active, this is normal. The sounds
will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESP activation.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering
wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate
that there is a problem with the power steering system.
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering
pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is
due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This
noise should be considered normal, and it does not in any
way damage the steering system.
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
ACCELERATION
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
pery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull errati-
cally to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when
there is a difference in the surface traction under the front
(driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have an accident. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
5
TRACTION
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precau-
tions should be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep the tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on, or cross, a road or a path where
water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off).
Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s
surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper
water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can
carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.
CAUTION!
•
Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
•
Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water, and if there are any obstacles
in the way, before driving through the standing
water.
•
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
CAUTION!
•
Driving through standing water may cause dam-
age to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Al-
ways inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,
transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination
(i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance)
after driving through standing water. Do not con-
tinue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further dam-
age. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
•
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
5
WARNING!
•
Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8
km/h) when driving through standing water.
•
Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stop-
ping distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
•
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
stranded.
•
Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
•
P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
•
European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter 9P9 is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
•
LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
•
Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
•
High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards, and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
5
Tire Sizing Chart
Tire Sizing Chart
P Passenger Car tire size based on U.S. design standards
(....blank....( Passenger Car tire based on European design standards
LT Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T Temporary spare tire
31 Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 Aspect Ratio of section height to section width of tire, written in percent (%)
10.5 Section width in inches (in)
R 9R9 means radial construction
9D9 means diagonal or bias construction
15 Rim diameter in inches (in)
95 Load Index (a numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry)
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing Chart
H A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load
index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified
operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
(....blank....(
•
Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire
•
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
•
Light Load = Light load tire
•
C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum
Load
Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum
Pressure
Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
STARTING AND OPERATING 351
5
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
Tire Identification Number
EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT Department of Transportation — This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. De-
partment of Transportation tire safety standards, and is approved for highway use
MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 Two digit number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (03 means the 3rd week)
01 Two digit number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (01 means the year 2001)
1
1
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire
was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on either the face of the driver’s door or the driver’s side
B-Pillar.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Tire Placard Location
Tire and Loading Information Placard
STARTING AND OPERATING 353
5
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement, “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement, “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs”
on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
each 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
354 STARTING AND OPERATING
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650
lbs [295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capaci-
ties of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carrying capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: For the following example, the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392
kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING 355
5
356 STARTING AND OPERATING
2WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
1. Safety—
WARNING!
•Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause accidents.
•Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result
in tire failure.
WARNING!
•Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
•Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect ve-
hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
STARTING AND OPERATING 357
5
WARNING!
•Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
•Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
•Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
2. Economy—
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation, also increases
tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consump-
tion.
3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability—
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed either on
the face of the driver’s door or on the driver’s side “B”
pillar.
358 STARTING AND OPERATING
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. DO NOT make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under inflated.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap (if equipped). This
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1
mi (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla-
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire Placard Location
STARTING AND OPERATING 359
5
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12 F (7 C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12 F (7 C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
buildup or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures for High-Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to original equipment information or an
authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating
speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High-speed driving with your vehicle at or above
maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on
your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75
mph (120 km/h).
360 STARTING AND OPERATING
Radial-Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four (or 6, in case
of trucks with dual rear wheels). NEVER combine
them with other types of tires.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
•
Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use
only. With these tires, DO NOT drive more than 50
mph (80 km/h).
•
Temporary-use spare tires have limited tread life.
When the tread is worn to the tread wear indica-
tors, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced.
•
Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to
your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
STARTING AND OPERATING 361
5
DO NOT install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
DO NOT install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, DO NOT
take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with
the compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle
may result.
Limited-Use Spare Tire — If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use on your vehicle. This tire is identified by a limited-
use spare tire warning label located on the limited use
spare tire and wheel assembly. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same tire,
replace (or repair) the original tire and reinstall on the
vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
•
The limited use spare tire is for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire
affects vehicle handling.
•
DO NOT drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) with
a limited use spare tire.
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
Keep the limited use spare tire inflated to the cold
tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire
placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assem-
bly.
•
Replace (or repair) the original tire at the first
opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Fail-
ure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, DO
NOT spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48
km/h) or continuously for longer than 30 seconds with-
out stopping when you are stuck.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in Section 6 of this
manual for additional information.
WARNING!
•
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gen-
erated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire
damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone.
•
DO NOT spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30
mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds con-
tinuously when you are stuck, and don’t let any-
one near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 363
5
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to
help you in determining when your tires should be replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this
point.
Tire Life
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including but not limited to:
•
Driving style
•
Tire pressure
•
Distance driven
WARNING!
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years,
regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow
this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You
could lose control and have an accident resulting in
serious injury or death.
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Please see “Tread Wear
Indicators” and “Tire and Loading Information” placard
for the size designation of your tire in this section. The
service description and load identification will be found
on the original equipment tire. Failure to use equivalent
replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, han-
dling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend that you
contact your original equipment manufacturer or an
authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have
on tire specifications or capability.
WARNING!
DO NOT use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of
unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension
dimensions and performance characteristics, result-
ing in changes to steering, handling, and braking of
your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling
and stress to steering and suspension components.
You could lose control and have an accident resulting
in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and
wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your
vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 365
5
WARNING!
•
NEVER use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have an accident.
•
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer
readings.
Alignment and Tire Balance
Poor suspension alignment may result in:
•
Fast tire wear.
•
Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided
wear.
•
Vehicle pull to right or left.
Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right.
Alignment will not correct this condition. See your
authorized dealer for proper diagnosis.
Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration.
Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-of-
balance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and
avoid tire cupping and spotty wear.
366 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE CHAINS
Use only compact chains, or other traction aids that meet
SAE type “Class S” specifications. Chains must be the
proper size for the vehicle, as recommended by the chain
manufacturer.
NOTE: Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the following
precautions:
• Because of restricted chain clearance between tires and other
suspension components, it is important that only chains in
good condition are used. Broken chains can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that
could indicate chain breakage. Remove the damaged parts of
the chain before further use.
• Do not exceed 45 mph (70 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps,
especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Install chains on the front wheels as tightly as possible and
then retighten after driving about one—half mile (0.8 km).
• Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pavement.
• Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions on the
method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for
use. Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the
chain manufacturer if different from the speed recom-
mended by the manufacturer.
STARTING AND OPERATING 367
5
Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both
the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacture suggest
a maximum speed. This notice applies to all chain
traction devices, including link and cable (radial) chains.
SNOW TIRES
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during Winter. Standard tires are of the all-season type
and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S
designation on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120
km/h).
TIRE ROTATION
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates, and tend to develop irregular wear pat-
terns.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on All-Season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your
type of driving found in the “Maintenance Schedules”
section of this manual. More frequent rotation is permis-
sible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per-
formed.
368 STARTING AND OPERATING
The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross”
shown in the following diagram.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
based on the cold inflation tire pressure requirements
found on the tire placard located on the driver’s-side
B-pillar.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than
three hours - and in outside ambient temperature. Refer
to the “Tires – General Information” in this section for
information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s
tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is
driven - this is normal and there should be no adjustment
for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
threshold for any reason, including low temperature
effects, or natural air pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended
cold tire placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure
warning has been illuminated, the tire pressure must be
STARTING AND OPERATING 369
5
increased to the recommended cold tire placard pressure
in order for the TPMS warning lamp to be turned off. The
system will automatically update and the TPMS warning
lamp will extinguish once the updated tire pressures
have been received. The vehicle may need to be driven
for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) to receive
this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of
35 psi (241 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C)
and the measured tire pressure is 30 psi (207 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 26 psi (179 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the TPMS
Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 30 psi (207 kPa), but the
TPMS Warning Light will still be on. In this situation, the
TPMS Warning Light will turn off only after the tires
have been inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire
pressure value.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have
been established for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not
use aftermarket sealants or balance beads if your
vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the
sensors may result.
370 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent mois-
ture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the TPMS SENSOR.
NOTE:
•
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
•
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
•
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
•
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, using an accurate tire pressure
gage, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS Warning Lamp.
NOTE: Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire
pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire
pressure in the tire.
BASIC TPMS WITHOUT EVIC — IF EQUIPPED
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev-
els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver
Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to check the
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
the proper pressure.
STARTING AND OPERATING 371
5
The Basic TPMS consists of the following components:
•
Receiver Module
•
Four Wheel Sensors
•
TPMS Telltale Warning Light
The TPMS Telltale Warning Light will illumi-
nate in the instrument cluster, and an audible
chime will be activated when one or more of
the four active road tire pressures are low.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible,
check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle,
and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold
tire pressure value (located on the placard on the
driver’s-side B-Pillar). The system will automatically
update and the TPMS Warning Lamp will extinguish
once the updated tire pressures have been received.
NOTE:
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10
minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) to receive this information.
The TPMS Warning Lamp will flash on and off for 75
seconds, and remain on sold when a system fault is
detected. The system fault will also sound a chime. If the
ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat, provid-
ing the system fault still exists. The TPMS Warning Lamp
will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A
system fault can occur with any of the following sce-
narios:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS
sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Accumulation of excessive snow and/or ice around
the wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
372 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
1. The compact spare tire (if equipped) does not have a
TPMS sensor. Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the
pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the TPMS Telltale Warning Light will turn on.
3. After driving for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25
km/h), the TPMS Telltale Warning Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the TPMS Telltale Warning Light will remain
on solid.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
tire, the TPMS will automatically update, and the TPMS
Telltale Warning Light will turn off as long as no tire
pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any
of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) for
the TPMS to receive this information.
PREMIUM TPMS WITH EVIC — IF EQUIPPED
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim-
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev-
els. Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver
Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important to regularly check
and maintain proper tire pressure in all the tires.
The Premium TPMS consists of the following compo-
nents:
•
Receiver Module
•
Four TPMS Sensors
STARTING AND OPERATING 373
5
•
Three Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four
wheel wells)
•
Various TPMS Messages, which display in the Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), and graph-
ics displaying tire pressures
•
Yellow TPMS Telltale Warning Light
TPMS Low Pressure Warnings
The TPMS Telltale Warning Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster, and an audible chime will be acti-
vated when one or more of the four active road tire
pressures are low. In addition, the EVIC will display one
or more Low Pressure messages (Left Front, Left Rear,
Right Front, Right Rear) for three seconds, and a graphic
display of the pressure value(s) with the low tire(s)
flashing.
Low Tire Pressure Display
374 STARTING AND OPERATING
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible,
and inflate the low tire(s) that is flashing on the graphic
display to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure
value. The system will automatically update, the graphic
display of the pressure value(s) will stop flashing, and
the TPMS Telltale Warning Light will extinguish once the
updated tire pressure(s) have been received. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph
(25 km/h) to receive this information.
Check TPMS Message
The TPMS Telltale Warning Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds, and remain on solid when a system fault is
detected. The system fault will also sound a chime. The
EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for
three seconds. This text message is then followed by a
graphic display, with --in place of the pressure value(s)
indicating which TPMS Sensor(s) is not being received.
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the TPMS Telltale Warning Light will no
longer flash, the CHECK TPM SYSTEM text message
Check TPM System Display
STARTING AND OPERATING 375
5
will not be present, and a pressure value will be dis-
played instead of dashes. Asystem fault can occur by any
of the following scenarios:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS
sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Accumulation of excessive snow and/or ice around
the wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
NOTE:
1. The compact spare tire (if equipped) does not have a
TPMS. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure
in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, the TPMS Telltale
Warning Light will remain on, a chime will sound, and
the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value in the
graphic display.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15
mph (25 km/h), the TPMS Telltale Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
In addition, the EVIC will display a 9CHECK TPM
SYSTEM9 message for three seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound, the TPMS Telltale Warning Light will flash on and
off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC
will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value.
376 STARTING AND OPERATING
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
TPMS Telltale Warning Light will turn off and the
graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value
instead of dashes (- -), as long no tire pressure is below
the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active
road tires.
NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10
minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS
to receive this information.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
The tire pressure sensors are regulated under one of the
following licenses:
United States .....................KR5S120123
Canada ........................2671-S120123
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.3L & 3.8L Gasoline Engine
All engines are designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and provide excellent
fuel economy and performance when us-
ing high-quality unleaded “regular” gaso-
line having an octane rating of 87. The use
of premium gasoline is not recommended.
Under normal conditions, the use of premium gasoline
will not provide a benefit over high-quality regular
STARTING AND OPERATING 377
5
gasolines, and in some circumstances may result in
poorer performance.
4.0L Gasoline Engine
The 4.0L engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide satisfac-
tory fuel economy and performance when
using high-quality unleaded gasoline hav-
ing an octane range of 87 to 89. The manu-
facturer recommends the use of 89 octane
for optimum performance. The use of premium gasoline
is not recommended. Under normal conditions, the use of
premium gasoline will not provide a benefit over high-
quality regular and mid-grade gasolines, and in some
circumstances may result in poorer performance.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of “regular” gasoline be-
fore considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 automobile manufacturers around the world
have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifica-
tions (the World Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) to define
fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions,
engine performance, and durability for your vehicle. The
manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet
the WWFC specifications if they are available.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
378 STARTING AND OPERATING
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro-
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygen-
ates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
and driveability problems and may damage critical
fuel system components.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or
E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from
Methanol, it does not have the negative effects of Metha-
nol.
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emission system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT.
STARTING AND OPERATING 379
5
It is even more important to look for gasolines without
MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels
higher than those allowed in the United States.
MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu-
lated gasolines.
Materials Added to Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives are not needed under
normal conditions and would result in additional cost.
Therefore you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
•
The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance
and damage the emission control system.
•
An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance.
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as
octane enhancers is not recommended. Most of these
products contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not
the responsibility of the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
•
To prevent carbon monoxide poisoning DO NOT
inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon monox-
ide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill.
•
NEVER run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and NEVER sit in a parked vehicle with
the engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 381
5
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
•
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnor-
mal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,
drive with all side windows fully open.
•
Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle
to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous
exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
As a reminder, a fuel icon with an arrow
indicating which side of the vehicle the fuel
filler door is located on, is located in the
instrument cluster, just below the Fuel Gage.
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the
left side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged,
be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
NOTE: The driver’s side sliding door cannot be opened
while the fuel door is open. This feature operates only
when the sliding door is fully closed prior to opening the
fuel door.
382 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emission control sys-
tem could result from using an improper fuel tank
filler tube cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let
impurities into the fuel system and may cause the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to turn on due to
fuel vapors escaping from the system.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
NOTE: When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full.
WARNING!
•
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filled.
•
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tions and will cause the malfunction indicator
light to turn on.
NOTE:
•
Tighten the fuel filler cap until you hear a “clicking”
sound. This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is
properly tightened.
•
If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light may come on. Be sure the gas cap
is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled.
STARTING AND OPERATING 383
5
WARNING!
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on the
ground while filling.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
•
If the gASCAP message is displayed in the instrument
cluster, this signifies a leak or change in the evapora-
tive system is detected. Sometimes this is the result of
a loosely fitting (or possibly damaged) filler cap.
Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
odometer reset button to turn the gASCAP message
off.
•
Make sure that the fuel filler cap is tightened each time
the vehicle is refueled.
•
If the problem continues, the message will appear the
next time the vehicle is started. See your authorized
dealer service center as soon as possible. See Section 7
of this manual for more information.
FLEXIBLE FUEL — 3.3L ENGINES ONLY
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel Ve-
hicles (FFV) only. These vehicles can be identified by the
unique fuel filler door label that states: Ethanol (E-85) or
Unleaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
the other sections of this manual for information on
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
gasoline only powered vehicles.
384 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 Decal and/or fuel filler
door label can operate on E-85.
ETHANOL FUEL (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and
15% unleaded gasoline.
E-85 Fuel Cap E-85 Badge
STARTING AND OPERATING 385
5
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smok-
ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov-
ing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.
Fuel Requirements
Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with
an octane rating of 87, or E-85 fuel, or any mixture of
these two.
For best results, a refueling pattern that alternates be-
tween E-85 and unleaded gasoline should be avoided.
When you do switch fuels, it is recommended that:
•
you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less
than one-quarter full
•
you do not add less than 5 gal (19 L) when refueling
•
you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for
a period of at least five minutes
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability
during warm up.
NOTE: When the ambient temperature is above 90°F
(32°C), you may experience hard starting and rough idle
following start-up even if the above recommendations
are followed.
386 STARTING AND OPERATING
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(FFV) E-85 and Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E85 require specially formulated
engine oils. These special requirements are included in
Mopart engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
DaimlerChrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer
only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and
meet the requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-
6395 contains additional requirements, developed during
extensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to
DaimlerChrysler Corporation engines. Use Mopart or an
equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an
increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up.
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon than
gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel con-
sumption. You can expect your MPG and your driving
range to decrease by about 30% compared to gasoline
operation.
Replacement Parts
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com-
patible parts.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 387
5
Maintenance
If you operate the vehicle using E-85 fuel, follow the
maintenance schedule section of this manual.
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect driveability.
VEHICLE LOADING
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
istration Regulations, your vehicle has a certification
label affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
If seats are removed for carrying cargo, do not exceed the
specified GVWR and GAWR.
Vehicle Certification Label Location
388 STARTING AND OPERATING
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label attached to
the driver’s door pillar.
The label contains the following information:
•
Name of manufacturer
•
Month and year of manufacture
•
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
•
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
•
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•
Type of Vehicle
•
Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
WARNING!
Because the front wheels drive and steer the vehicle,
it is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
STARTING AND OPERATING 389
5
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and front
and rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
it is not over the GVWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
390 STARTING AND OPERATING
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle by axle and side by side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 391
5
A loaded vehicle is shown in the illustration. Note that
neither the GVWR or the GAWR capacities have been
exceeded.
LOADING TABLE — EXAMPLE ONLY
Front Axle Rear Axle
Empty Weight 2,140 lbs
(971 kg)
1,470 lbs
(667 kg)
Load (Driver,
passengers, and
cargo/luggage)
360 lbs
(163 kg)
980 lbs
(445 kg)
TOTAL 2,500 lbs
(1 134 kg)
2,450 lbs
(1 111 kg)
GAWR 2,544 lbs
(1 154 kg)
2,544 lbs
(1 154 kg)
A loaded vehicle is shown in the above table. Note that
neither the GVWR nor the GAWR capacities have been
exceeded.
NOTE: Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” at-
tached to the rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR’s. This table is only an example.
392 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully re-
view this information to tow your load as efficiently and
safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-
hicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing-related definitions will as-
sist you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight. The total load must be limited so
that you do not exceed the GVWR.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The gross trailer weight (GTW) is the weight of the trailer
plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its
9loaded and ready for operation9 condition. The recom-
mended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded
trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer
must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The gross combination weight rating (GCWR) is the total
permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when
weighed in combination. (Note that GCWR ratings in-
clude a 68 kg (150 lbs) allowance for the presence of a
driver).
STARTING AND OPERATING 393
5
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Trailer Tongue Weight (TW)
The downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the
trailer. In most cases it should not be less than 10% or
more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider this
as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The maximum height and maximum width of the front of
a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. This type of
hitch is the most popular on the market today and is
commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized trailers.
394 STARTING AND OPERATING
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer’s axle(s). When
used in accordance with the manufacturers directions, it
provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW), and may be required depending on Ve-
hicle and Trailer configuration/loading to comply with
gross axle weight rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking per-
formance, and could result in an accident.
Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with an autho-
rized hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable
authorized Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional
information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 395
5
Weight Distributing Hitch System Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing System
396 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classifications
Your vehicle may be factory-equipped for safe towing of
trailers weighing over 2,000 lbs (907 kg) with the optional
Trailer Tow Prep Package. See an authorized dealer for
package content.
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry
Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium
Duty
3,500 lbs (1587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2268 kg)
Class IV - Extra
Heavy Duty
10,000 lbs (4540 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 397
5
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The Trailer Towing Weights Chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for a given drivetrain.
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
Engine/
Transaxle
GCWR
(Gross Combined
Wt. Rating)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
Max. Tongue
Wt.
3.3L, 3.8L and
4.0L / Auto-
matic
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg) 22 sq ft (2.0 sq m) Up to 2 persons & Luggage 1,800 lbs (816 kg) 180 lbs (82 kg)
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg) 22 sq ft (2.0 sq m) 3 to 5 persons & Luggage 1,350 lbs (612 kg) 135 lbs (61 kg)
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg) 22 sq ft (2.0 sq m) 6 to 7 persons & Luggage 1,000 lbs (454 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
3.8L and 4.0L
/Automatic
(with trailer
tow package)
9,000 lbs (4 082 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) Up to 2 persons & Luggage 3,800 lbs (1 723 kg)
1
380 lbs (172 kg)
9,000 lbs (4 082 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 3 to 5 persons & Luggage 3,350 lbs (1 519 kg)
1
335 lbs (152 kg)
9,000 lbs (4 082 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 6 to 7 persons & Luggage 3,000 lbs (1 360 kg)
1
300 lbs (136 kg)
1
For vehicles equipped with Fold-in-Floor seating, the Gross Trailer Weight must be reduced by 100 lbs (45 kg). Refer to local
laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and should
never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to the Tire–Safety Information Sec-
tion in this manual.
398 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer and Trailer Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to severely sway side-to-side,
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer accidents.
Never exceed the maximum trailer tongue weight
stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
•
Trailer tongue weight
•
Weight of any other type of cargo/luggage or equip-
ment put in or on your vehicle
•
Weight of the driver and all passengers
STARTING AND OPERATING 399
5
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or authorized dealer-installed
options, must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information
placard in the Tire Safety Information Section of this
manual for the maximum combined weight of occupants
and cargo for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle driv-
etrain components, the following guidelines are recom-
mended:
CAUTION!
•
Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 mi (805 km)
of vehicle operation. Doing so may damage your
vehicle.
•
During the first 500 mi (805 km) of trailer towing,
limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).
Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this
manual. When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR
or GCWR ratings.
400 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have an accident.
•
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not over-
load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a
loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes,
axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chas-
sis structure or tires.
•
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
•
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.
When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow
vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in
PARK. Always, block or 9chock9 the trailer wheels.
•
GCWR must not be exceeded.
•
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
STARTING AND OPERATING 401
5
4. Trailer tongue weight rating for that trailer hitch.
(This requirement may limit the ability to always
achieve the 10% to 15% range of trailer tongue weight
as a percentage of total trailer weight.)
Towing Requirements — Tires
•
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
•
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to the
Tires–General Information section of this manual on
Tire Pressures for proper tire inflation procedures.
•
Also, check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
•
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to the Tires–General
Information section of this manual on Tread Wear
Indicators for the proper inspection procedure.
•
When replacing tires refer to the Tires–General Infor-
mation section of this manual on Replacement Tires
for proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires
with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase
the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
•
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
•
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
402 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000
lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000
lbs (907 kg).
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hy-
draulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys-
tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
tance. When towing you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
STARTING AND OPERATING 403
5
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights and Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four-pin or a
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer
harness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following four-pin connector and seven-pin
connector illustrations.
Four-Pin Connector
404 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
Towing Tips — Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE gear can be selected when towing. However,
if frequent shifting occurs while in DRIVE, move the gear
selector lever into third gear (with four-speed transmis-
sion) or fifth gear (with six-speed transmission).
NOTE: Moving the gear selector lever into third gear
(with four-speed transmission) or fifth gear (with six-
speed transmission) while operating the vehicle under
heavy operating conditions will improve performance
and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shift-
ing and heat build up. This action will also provide better
engine braking.
The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than
45 minutes of continuous operation. Refer to the “Main-
tenance Schedule” in Section 8 of this manual for trans-
mission fluid change intervals.
Seven-Pin Connector
STARTING AND OPERATING 405
5
NOTE:
•
Check the automatic transmission fluid level before
towing.
•
The six-speed automatic transmission is sealed and
requires an authorized dealer service center to check
the transmission fluid.
Towing Tips — Electronic Speed Control (If
Equipped)
•
Don’t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
•
When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
•
Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Towing Tips — Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
•
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, put transmission
gear selector lever in NEUTRAL but do not increase
engine idle speed.
•
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
•
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
•
Refer to Cooling System Operating information in the
Maintenance section of this manual for more informa-
tion.
406 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle behind another vehicle (flat-
towing with all four wheels on the ground) IS NOT
RECOMMENDED.
NOTE: If the vehicle requires towing make sure all four
wheels are off the ground.
STARTING AND OPERATING 407
5
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
m Hazard Warning Flasher ..................410
m If Your Engine Overheats .................410
m Jacking And Tire Changing ................412
▫ Jack Location ........................413
m Jump-Starting Procedure ..................425
m Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ..................427
m Towing A Disabled Vehicle ................428
▫ Towing With The Ignition Key ............428
6
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
The hazard flasher switch is located in the center of
the instrument panel below the radio.
To engage the Hazard Warning Flashers, depress the
switch on the instrument panel. When the Hazard Warn-
ing Switch is activated, all directional turn signals will
flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emer-
gency. Push the switch a second time to turn off the
flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition switch is OFF.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning Flash-
ers may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-
tion.
•
On the highways — Slow down.
•
In city traffic — While stopped, shift the transmission
gear selector lever into NEUTRAL, but do not increase
engine idle speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition. If your air conditioner
is on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C
removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature
control to maximum heat, the Mode control to floor, and
410 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
the fan control to High. This allows the heater core to act
as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H”, turn the engine off immediately, and call for
service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, see Section 7, Maintenance, of this
manual. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 411
6
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
•
Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you.
You could be crushed. Never get any part of your
body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need
to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
•
The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
For vehicles equipped with Stow ’n Go seating, if it
is necessary to retrieve the spare tire from under the
vehicle on the side of the vehicle close to moving
traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the
danger of being hit.
412 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jack Location
The jack, jack handle and winch handle tools are stowed
behind the rear left side trim panel in the rear cargo area.
Turn the two cover latches to release the cover.
Remove the pouch containing the scissors jack, jack
handle, and tools.
Rear Compartment Features
1 - Tie Down 5 - Liftgate Close Switch
2 - Switch Bank 6 - Bag Holders
3 - Tire Jack/Handle 7 - Child Seat LATCH Anchor
4 - Cubby/Speaker 8 - Rechargeable Flash Light
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 413
6
Spare Tire Removal
For vehicles equipped with Stow ’n Go seating, the spare
tire is stowed inside a protective cover located under the
center of the vehicle by means of a cable winch mecha-
nism. The “spare tire drive” nut is located on the floor,
under a plastic cap at the front of the floor console.
NOTE: The base console, if equipped, must be removed
to raise and lower the spare tire. Refer to “Console
Features” in Section 3, for the console removal procedure.
The tool pouch contains three pieces and can be as-
sembled into a Spare Tire Hook; to remove the compact
spare tire/cover assembly from under the vehicle, or a
Winch “T” Handle; to raise/lower the compact spare
tire/cover assembly.
Stow ’n Go Tools
414 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Preparations For Jacking
Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoid ice or
slippery areas, set the parking brake and place the gear
selector in PARK. Turn OFF the ignition.
•
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher.
•
Block both the front and rear
of the wheel diagonally oppo-
site the jacking position. For
example, if changing the right
front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
•
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
Jack Warning Label
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 415
6
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
•
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
•
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
•
Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in park; a manual transmission in
reverse.
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
• Turn on the Hazard warning flasher.
416 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still
on the ground.
2. To remove the compact spare tire/cover assembly,
assemble the winch handle extensions to form a “T’ and
fit the winch “T” handle over the drive nut. Rotate the
nut to the left until the winch mechanism stops turning
freely. This will allow enough slack in the cable to allow
you to pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
winch “T” handle only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
winch.
3. Assemble the winch handle extensions to form the
Spare Tire Hook and pull the compact spare tire/cover
assembly from under the vehicle.
WARNING!
Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never get any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 417
6
NOTE: If either front tire is flat, it may be necessary to
jack up the vehicle to remove the compact spare tire/
cover assembly from under the vehicle. Refer to jack
engagement locations in the following steps for proper
jack placement.
4. When the compact spare tire/cover assembly is clear
of the vehicle, stand the tire/cover assembly upright and
remove the wheel spacer by squeezing the two retaining
tabs together.
Spare Tire Hook & Removal
Squeezing Winch Retainer Tabs
418 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. There are two jack engagement locations on each side
of the vehicle body. These locations are on the sill flange
of the vehicle body.
NOTE: Rear jack location is between a pair of down-
standing tabs on the sill flange of the vehicle body.
Front jack location is on the sill flange of the vehicle body
and aligns with the front door edge.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 419
6
Jack Location
420 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in Step 5.
6. Place the wrench on the jack screw and turn to the
right until the jack head is properly engaged in the
described location. Do not raise the vehicle until you are
sure the jack is securely engaged.
7. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right,
using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until the
tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift
provides maximum stability.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
8. Remove the wheel lug nuts, for vehicles with wheel
covers, remove the cover from the wheel by hand. Do not
pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel off the hub.
9. Install the compact spare tire. Lightly tighten the lug
nuts. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been
lowered.
NOTE: Do not install the wheel cover on the compact
spare.
Do not use a hammer or force to install the wheel covers.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 421
6
10. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the
left.
11. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate
lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. Correct
wheel nut tightness is 95 ft lbs (130 N·m). If in doubt
about the correct tightness, have them checked with a
torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service
station.
12. Lower the jack to its fully-closed position.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
13. Place the deflated (flat) tire and compact spare tire
cover assembly in the rear cargo area. Do not stow the
deflated tire in the spare tire location. Have the full
sized tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible.
14. Stow the cable and wheel spacer before driving the
vehicle. Reassemble the winch handle extensions to form
a “T’ and fit the winch “T” handle over the drive nut.
Rotate the nut to the right until the winch mechanism
clicks at least three times.
15. Stow the jack, jack handle and winch handle tools.
16. Check the compact spare tire pressure as soon as
possible. Correct pressure as required.
Wheel Nuts
All wheel nuts should be tightened occasionally to elimi-
nate the possibility of wheel studs being sheared or the
bolt holes in the wheels becoming elongated. This is
especially important during the first few hundred miles
422 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
of operation, and after each time a tire is changed, to
allow the wheel nuts to become properly set. All nuts
should first be firmly seated against the wheel. The nuts
should then be tightened to recommended torque.
Tighten the nuts to final torque in increments. Progress
around the bolt circle, tightening the nut opposite to the
nut just previously tightened until final torque is
achieved. Recommended torque is 95 ft lbs (130 N·m).
Secure The Spare Tire As Follows:
1. To stow the compact spare tire/cover assembly on
vehicles equipped with Stow ’n Go seating, assemble the
winch handle extensions to form a “T’ and fit the winch
“T” handle over the drive nut. Rotate the nut to the left
until the winch mechanism stops turning freely. This will
allow enough slack in the cable to allow you to pull the
wheel spacer out from under the vehicle.
WARNING!
A loose compact spare tire/cover assembly, thrown
forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger
the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the com-
pact spare tire with the cover assembly in the place
provided.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
winch “T” handle only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
winch.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 423
6
2. Assemble the winch handle extensions to form the
Spare Tire Hook and pull the wheel spacer from under
the vehicle.
3. Turn the compact spare tire so that the valve stem is
down and place the tire into the spare tire cover assem-
bly. Slide the wheel spacer through the center of the
wheel and spare tire cover assembly so that the two
retainer tabs snap out and engage the spare tire cover on
the opposite side.
CAUTION!
The compact spare tire cover assembly must be used
when the compact spare tire is stored. Failure to use
this cover could drastically reduce the life of the
compact spare tire.
WARNING!
Verify that ’both’ retainer tabs of the wheel spacer
have been properly extended through the center of
the wheel and spare tire cover assembly. Failure to
properly engage both retainer tabs could result in
loss of the spare tire & cover assembly, which will
cause vehicle damage and may cause loss of control
of the vehicle.
4. Using the winch “T” handle, rotate the drive nut to the
right until the compact spare tire/cover assembly is
drawn into place against the underside of the vehicle.
5. Continue to rotate the nut to the right until you hear
the winch mechanism click three times. It cannot be
overtightened. Check under the vehicle to ensure the
compact spare tire/cover assembly is positioned cor-
rectly against the underside of the vehicle.
424 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
For vehicles equipped with Stow ’n Go seating, the
Winch Mechanism is designed specifically to stow a
COMPACT Spare Tire ONLY. Do not attempt to use
the Winch to stow the Full Size ’Flat’ Tire, or any
other Full Size Tire. Vehicle damage may result.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE
WARNING!
• DO NOT attempt to push or tow the vehicle to get it started. Vehicles
equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way.
Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to obtain
a start from another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done
improperly, so follow this procedure carefully.
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; DO NOT allow battery fluid to
contact eyes, skin or clothing. Don’t lean over battery when attaching
clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other. If acid splashes in the eyes
or on the skin, flush the contaminated area immediately with large
quantities of water.
• A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep
all flames or sparks away from the vent holes. DO NOT use a booster
battery or any other booster source with an output that exceeds 12 volts.
• During cold weather when temperatures are below freezing point, electro-
lyte in a discharged battery may freeze. DO NOT attempt jump-starting
because the battery could rupture or explode. The battery temperature must
be brought up above freezing point before attempting jump-start.
• Take special care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is
raised. The cooling fan is electrically operated and can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be hurt by the fan.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 425
6
When jump-starting, proceed as follows:
1. Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry
such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an
inadvertent electrical contact.
2. When a boost is provided by a battery in another
vehicle, park that vehicle within booster cable reach and
without letting the vehicles touch. Set the parking brake,
place the automatic transmission selector lever into
PARK and turn the ignition switch to the OFF position for
both vehicles.
3. Turn OFF the heater, radio and all unnecessary elec-
trical loads.
4. Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive
terminal of the discharged battery. Connect the other end
of the same cable to the positive terminal of the booster
battery.
WARNING!
DO NOT permit vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
5. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal
of the booster battery, and then to the engine of the
vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure there is a
good contact on the engine.
WARNING!
DO NOT connect the cable to the negative post of the
discharge battery. The resulting electrical spark could
cause the battery to explode.
426 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
6. Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
7. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above
sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.
WARNING!
Any procedure other than the jump-starting process
listed could result in:
•
Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out
the battery vent;
•
Personal injury or property damage due to battery
explosion;
•
Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or
of immobilized vehicle.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift the gear selector lever back and
forth between REVERSE and DRIVE. Usually the least
amount of accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the
rocking motion without spinning the wheels is most
effective.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 35
mph (55 km/h) when you are stuck. And don’t let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 427
6
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It
can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 35 mph (55 km/h).
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Towing With The Ignition Key
Your vehicle may be towed under the following condi-
tions: The gear selector lever must be in NEUTRAL, the
distance to be traveled must not exceed 100 mi (160 km),
and the towing speed must not exceed 44 mph (72
km/h). Exceeding these towing limits may cause a trans-
mission geartrain failure. If the transmission is not op-
erative, or if the vehicle is to be towed more than 100 mi
(160 km), the vehicle must be towed with the front
wheels off the ground.
CAUTION!
•
Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front
with sling type towing equipment. Damage to the
front fascia will result.
•
Always use wheel lift equipment when towing
from the front. The only other approved method of
towing is with a flat bed truck.
•
Do not tow the vehicle from the rear. Damage to
the rear sheet metal, liftgate and fascia will occur.
428 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
•
Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans-
mission may result.
•
If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
ignition switch must be in the OFF position, not in
the LOCK or ACC positions.
If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed
(wipers, defrosters, etc.), the key must be in the ON
position, not the ACC position. Make certain the trans-
mission remains in NEUTRAL.
Towing Without The Ignition Key
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK position. The only ap-
proved method of towing with out the ignition key is
with a flat bed truck. Proper towing equipment is neces-
sary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat
towing with all four wheels on the ground)
Flat towing of vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission, is only permitted within the limitations
described in this section.
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With
A Tow Dolly
The manufacturer does not recommend that you tow a
front wheel drive vehicle on a tow dolly. Vehicle damage
may occur.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 429
6
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
m 3.3L Engine Compartment ................434
m 3.8L Engine Compartment ................435
m 4.0L Engine Compartment ................436
m Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II ........437
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message — gASCAP . . .438
m Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs ............................438
m Replacement Parts ......................440
m Authorized Dealer Service ................440
m Maintenance Procedures ..................441
▫ Engine Oil ..........................441
▫ Engine Oil Filter ......................444
▫ Drive Belt ...........................445
▫ Spark Plugs .........................445
▫ Engine Air Cleaner ....................445
▫ Catalytic Converter ....................446
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery ................448
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance .............450
7
▫ Power Steering — Fluid Check ............452
▫ Front Suspension — Ball Joints ............453
▫ Steering Shaft Seal ....................453
▫ Drive Shaft Universal Joints ..............454
▫ Body Lubrication .....................454
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades ................454
▫ Cooling System .......................456
▫ Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses .......461
▫ Fuel System Connections ................461
▫ Brakes .............................462
▫ Automatic Transaxle ...................464
▫ Front And Rear Wheel Bearings ...........467
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion ...........................467
▫ Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cup Holders . .473
m Fuses/Totally Integrated Power Module
(TIPM) ..............................474
m Vehicle Storage ........................481
m Replacement Light Bulbs .................481
m Bulb Replacement ......................482
▫ Headlights ..........................482
▫ Front Park/Turn Signal And Side Marker
Lights .............................483
▫ Fog Lights ..........................483
▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, Side Marker And
Backup Lights ........................484
432 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3.3L ENGINE COMPARTMENT
434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3.8L ENGINE COMPARTMENT
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435
7
4.0L ENGINE COMPARTMENT
436 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light.” It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
•
Prolonged driving with the “Malfunction Indica-
tor Light” on could cause further damage to the
emission control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle must be
serviced before any emissions tests can be per-
formed.
•
If the “Malfunction Indicator Light” is flashing
while the engine is running, severe catalytic con-
verter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 437
7
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message — gASCAP
Should the “Loose Fuel Filler Cap” or “gASCAP” mes-
sage appear, there may be a problem in the evaporative
system. Before taking the vehicle into an authorized
dealer, check first to see if the fuel filler cap is possibly
loose, improperly installed, or damaged. A loose fuel
filler cap message will be displayed in the instrument
cluster. Tighten the gas cap until a 9clicking9 sound is
heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly
tightened. Press the odometer reset button to turn the
message off. If the problem persists, the message will
appear the next time the vehicle is started. If the problem
is detected twice in a row, the system will turn on the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). Resolving the prob-
lem will turn the MIL light off. Take your vehicle in to an
authorized dealer.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of this vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) is functioning and is not on
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system
is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if the vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery, or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, the vehicle may fail the test.
438 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if this vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
do the following:
1. Insert the ignition key into the ignition switch.
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank
or start the engine.
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
4. As soon as you turn the ignition key to the ON
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check.
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition key or start the engine. This means that the
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition key or start
the engine. This means that the vehicle’s OBD II
system is ready, and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If the OBD II system is not ready, you should see an
authorized dealer or repair facility. If this vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive the vehicle
as you normally would in order for the OBD II system to
update. A recheck with the above test routine may then
indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether the vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not ready, if the MIL is illuminated during
normal vehicle operation, you should have the vehicle
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 439
7
serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station
can fail the vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine Mopart parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-Mopart parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
AUTHORIZED DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these service manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
440 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed
maintenance intervals, there are other items that should
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.
However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is
observed or suspected.
ENGINE OIL
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
The best time to check the engine oil level is about five
minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before
starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 441
7
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at
the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these
engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 of this
manual for information on this system.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months,
whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
Engine Oil Dipstick
442 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet
the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard
MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.3L & 3.8L
Gasoline Engines
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil filler
cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for
your vehicle.
For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to
the Engine Compartment illustration in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 4.0 Liter
Engines
SAE 10W-30 engine oil is preferred for all operating
temperatures. The engine oil filler cap also shows the
recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle.
Lubricants which DO NOT have both, the engine oil
certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
number should not be used.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 443
7
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Materials Added to Engine Oil
The manufacture strongly recommends against the addi-
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-
tives.
Disposing of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station, or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
The manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. Mopart Engine Oil Filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
444 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
DRIVE BELT
At the mileage indicated in the maintenance schedule,
replace the drive belt with a new drive belt.
NOTE: The drive belt must be routed correctly to ensure
proper drive function.
SPARK PLUGS
Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine perfor-
mance and emission control. New plugs should be in-
stalled at the specified mileage. The entire set should be
replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark
plug. Malfunctioning spark plugs can damage the cata-
lytic converter. For proper type of replacement spark
plugs, refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for
correct spark plug type.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 of this
manual for engine air cleaner filter maintenance inter-
vals.
NOTE: Be sure to follow the “dusty or off-road condi-
tions” maintenance interval if applicable.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 445
7
CATALYTIC CONVERTER
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
catalyst as an emission control device.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
CAUTION!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
vehicle.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
446 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may indicate severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, the
vehicle should be stopped, the engine shut off and the
vehicle allowed to cool. Thereafter, service, including a
tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be ob-
tained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
•
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transaxle is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
•
Do not try to start engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
•
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idling or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 447
7
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to “Exhaust Gas” in the Safety Tips section of this
manual.
MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY
The top of the MAINTENANCE-FREE battery is perma-
nently sealed. You will never have to add water, nor is
periodic maintenance required.
448 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Don’t allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin or clothing. Don’t lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water.
•
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Don’t use a
booster battery or any other booster source with an
output greater than 12 volts. Don’t allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
•
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
CAUTION!
•
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked posi-
tive (+) and negative (-) and identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
•
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 449
7
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a system
performance check. Drive belt tension should also be
checked at this time.
WARNING!
•
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for
further warranty information.
•
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
450 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by an authorized dealer or other an
authorized service facility using recovery and recycling
equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compres-
sor Oil, or Refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 of this
manual for A/C Air Filter service intervals.
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C Air Filter while the blower is
operating or personal injury may result.
The A/C Air Filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove box. Perform the following procedure to re-
place the filter:
1. Open the glove box and remove all contents.
2. Push in on the sides of the glove box and lower the
door.
3. Pivot the glove box downward.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 451
7
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter
cover to the HVAC housing and remove the cover.
5. Remove the A/C Air Filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing.
6. Install the A/C Air Filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the
cover.
CAUTION!
The A/C Air Filter is labeled with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
7. Rotate the glove box door back into position.
POWER STEERING — FLUID CHECK
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
A/C Air Filter Replacement
452 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho-
rized DaimlerChrysler Dealership.9
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts
for correct fluid type.
FRONT SUSPENSION — BALL JOINTS
The front suspension ball joints are permanently sealed.
No regular maintenance is required for these compo-
nents.
STEERING SHAFT SEAL
The steering shaft seal, at the point where the shaft passes
through the bulkhead, is lubricated when it is installed. If
the seal becomes noisy when the steering shaft is turned,
it should be lubricated with a multipurpose grease.
Mopart multipurpose lubricant is recommended.
Steering Linkage
The tie rod end ball joints are permanently lubricated and
do not require periodic maintenance.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 453
7
DRIVE SHAFT UNIVERSAL JOINTS
Your vehicle has constant velocity universal joints. Peri-
odic lubrication of these joints is not required. However,
the joint boots should be inspected for external leakage or
damage when other maintenance is performed. If leakage
or damage is evident, the universal joint boot and grease
should be replaced immediately.
Continued operation could result in failure of the univer-
sal joint due to water and dirt contamination of the
grease. This would require complete replacement of the
joint assembly.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, doors, liftgate, sliding doors and hood hinges,
should be lubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mecha-
nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopart Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
The rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield
should be cleaned periodically with a sponge or soft cloth
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accu-
mulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
454 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
Windshield and Rear Window Washers
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer is shared. It is located in the engine
compartment and should be checked for fluid level at
regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield
washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the
system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water.
The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid
when the Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
After the engine has warmed, operate the defroster for a
few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or
freezing the fluid on the cold windshield. Mopart All
Weather Windshield Washer Solution, used with water as
directed on the container, aids cleaning action, reduces
the freezing point to avoid line clogging, and is not
harmful to paint or trim.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 455
7
COOLING SYSTEM
WARNING!
•
When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at anytime the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
•
You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant
or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear
steam coming from under the hood, don’t open the
hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never
try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the
radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the
system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh
coolant. Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-
ber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
coolant from the radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealing
properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to
456 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
drain from the coolant recovery bottle. DO NOT RE-
MOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE
COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush and Refill
The system should be drained, flushed, and refilled at the
intervals shown in the “Maintenance Schedule” in Sec-
tion 8 of this manual.
If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount
of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable cooling
system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove
all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of old
antifreeze solution.
Selection Of Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended coolant, refer
to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct
coolant type.
CAUTION!
Mixing of coolants other than specified Hybrid Or-
ganic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolants,
may result in engine damage and may decrease
corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT coolant is intro-
duced into the cooling system in an emergency, it
should be replaced with the specified coolant as soon
as possible.
Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or anti-rust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based coolants. Use of Propylene
Glycol based coolants is not recommended.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 457
7
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals. This
coolant can be used up to five years or 102,000 mi (170
000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this
extended maintenance period, it is important that you
use the same coolant throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) coolant.
When adding coolant, a minimum solution of 50% rec-
ommended Mopart Antifreeze/ Coolant Five Year/
100,000 mi (160 934 km) Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology), or equivalent, in water should be
used. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if
temperatures below 234°F (237°C ) are anticipated.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant solution.
The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of
corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the
engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant
changes.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
coolant, and to ensure that coolant will return to the
radiator from the coolant recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
458 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre-
caution. Never add coolant when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scald-
ing or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while
the system is hot or under pressure.
•
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
Disposal of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant is a regulated
substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children
do not store ethylene glycol-based engine coolant in open
containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
ground. If ingested by a child, contact a physician
immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine cold, the level of the coolant in the coolant
recovery bottle should be between the ranges indicated
on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
coolant freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your
service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating
temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only
be checked once a month.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 459
7
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the
proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do
not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles (a
few kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is
normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot coolant to
enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
•
Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
•
Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant recovery bottle. If antifreeze needs to be
added, contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be
protected against freezing.
•
If frequent coolant additions are required, or if the
level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when
the engine cools, the cooling system should be pres-
sure tested for leaks.
•
Maintain coolant concentration at 50% HOAT engine
coolant (minimum) and distilled water for proper
corrosion protection of your engine which contains
aluminum components.
•
Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
•
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean, also.
460 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
HOSES AND VACUUM/VAPOR HARNESSES
Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence
of heat and mechanical damage. Hard or soft spots,
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and exces-
sive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber.
Pay particular attention to those hoses nearest to high
heat sources such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect hose
routing to be sure hoses do not come in contact with any
heat source or moving component which may cause heat
damage or mechanical wear.
Ensure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed.
Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou-
plings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are
present.
Components should be replaced immediately if there is
any evidence of wear or damage that could cause failure.
FUEL SYSTEM CONNECTIONS
The Electronic Fuel Injection high-pressure fuel system’s
hoses and quick connect fittings have unique material
characteristics that provide adequate sealing and resist
attack by deteriorated gasoline.
You are urged to use only the manufacture specified
hoses with quick connect fittings, or their equivalent in
material and specification, in any fuel system servicing. It
is mandatory to replace any damaged hoses or quick
connect fittings that have been removed during service.
Care should be taken in installing quick connect fittings
to ensure they are properly installed and fully connected.
See your authorized dealer for service.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 461
7
BRAKES
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Suggested service intervals can be found in the Mainte-
nance Schedules.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Brake And Power Steering Hoses
When the vehicle is serviced for scheduled maintenance,
inspect surface of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of
heat and mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, abrasion, and excessive swelling
indicate deterioration of the rubber. Particular attention
should be made to examining those hose surfaces nearest
to high heat sources, such as the exhaust manifold.
Ensure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed.
Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou-
plings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are
present.
NOTE: Often, fluid such as oil, power steering fluid,
and brake fluid are used during assembly plant opera-
tions to facilitate the assembly of hoses to couplings.
Therefore, oil wetness at the hose-coupling area is not
necessarily an indication of leakage. Actual dripping of
hot fluid when systems are under pressure (during
vehicle operation), should be noted before hose is re-
placed based on leakage.
462 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Inspection of brake hoses should be performed
whenever the brake system is serviced and every engine
oil change. Inspect hydraulic brake hoses for surface
cracking, scuffing, or worn spots. If there is any evidence
of cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, the hose should be
replaced immediately! Eventual deterioration of the hose
can take place resulting in a possibility of a burst failure.
WARNING!
Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure.
You could have an accident. If you see any signs of
cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, have the brake
hoses replaced immediately.
Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing underhood services, or immediately if
the brake system warning light indicates system failure.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the
“FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require-
ments described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid, refer
to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid
type.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 463
7
WARNING!
•
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
brake fluid catching fire.
•
Use of a brake fluid that has a lower initial boiling
point than the recommended MOPARt DOT 3
product or a brake fluid that is unidentified as to
FMVSS specification may result in sudden brake
failure during hard prolonged braking. You could
have an accident.
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture.
CAUTION!
Do not allow petroleum base fluid to contaminate the
brake fluid — all brake seal components could be
damaged causing partial or complete brake failure.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
The automatic transaxle and differential assembly are
contained within a single housing.
The fluid level in the automatic transaxle should be
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced. Operation with
an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the
transaxle and the fluid.
All Four–Speed automatic transaxles are equipped with a
conventional filler tube and dipstick. If fluid is added, it
should be added through the filler tube.
464 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
All six speed transaxles are equipped with a capped
dipstick tube, it is sealed and should not be tampered
with. Your authorized dealer has the necessary tools to
ensure that the fluid level is set properly.
Selection of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transaxle to assure optimum transaxle performance. Use
only manufacturer’s recommended transaxle fluid; refer
to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid
type. It is important that the transaxle fluid be main-
tained at the prescribed level using the recommended
fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in any trans-
axle; only the approved lubricant may be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transaxle fluid other than the manufacturer’s
recommended fluid may cause deterioration in trans-
axle shift quality and/or torque converter shudder.
Using a transaxle fluid other than the manufacturer’s
recommended fluid will result in more frequent
fluid and filter changes. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants
and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type.
Fluid Level Check — 3.8L and 4.0L Engines with
Six-Speed Automatic Transaxle — If Equipped
The Six-Speed automatic transaxle is a sealed unit and
has no dipstick. See your authorized dealer to have the
transaxle fluid checked or serviced.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 465
7
Fluid Level Check — 3.3L Engine with Four-Speed
Automatic Transaxle — If Equipped
The dipstick is located just behind the radiator, lower
right side.
To properly check the automatic transaxle fluid level, the
following procedure must be used:
1. The vehicle must be on level ground.
2. The engine should be running at curb idle speed for a
minimum of 60 seconds.
3. Fully apply parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector lever momentarily in each gear
position ending with the lever in PARK. Wipe the area
around the dipstick clean to eliminate the possibility of
dirt entering the transaxle.
5. Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot
or warm. Hot fluid is approximately 180°F (82°C), which
is the normal operating temperature after the vehicle has
been driven at least 15 miles (24 km). The fluid cannot be
comfortably held between the finger tips. Cold is when
the fluid is below 80°F (27°C).
6. Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated.
Remove dipstick and note reading.
a. If the fluid is hot, the reading should be in the
crosshatched area marked “HOT” (between the upper
two holes in the dipstick).
b. If the fluid is cold, the fluid level should be between
the lower two holes in the area marked “COLD”.
4 Speed ATX Diptstick
466 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
If the fluid level indicates low, add sufficient fluid to
bring to the proper level.
CAUTION!
Do not overfill. Dirt and water in the transaxle can
cause serious damage. To prevent dirt and water from
entering the transaxle after checking or replenishing
fluid, make certain that the dipstick cap is reseated
properly.
Fluid and Filter Changes
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 of this
manual for the recommended transaxle fluid and filter
change intervals.
If the transaxle is disassembled for any reason, the fluid
and filter should be changed.
Special Additives
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-
tives to the transaxle. The only exception to this policy is
the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks. In
addition, avoid using transaxle sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
FRONT AND REAR WHEEL BEARINGS
Front and rear wheel bearings are permanently sealed.
No regular maintenance is required for these compo-
nents.
APPEARANCE CARE AND PROTECTION FROM
CORROSION
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 467
7
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
•
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation
•
Stone and gravel impact
•
Insects, tree sap and tar
•
Salt in the air near seacoast localities
•
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants
Washing
•
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using Mopart Car Wash or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
•
If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use Mopart Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
•
Use Mopart Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
scratch the paint.
468 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
as steel wool or scouring powder, which will scratch
metal and painted surfaces.
Special Care
•
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
•
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and
open.
•
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
•
If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause which destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos-
sible. The cost of such repairs is considered the respon-
sibility of the owner.
•
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
•
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
•
Use Mopart touch up paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 469
7
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome-plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use Mopart
Wheel Cleaner (05066247AB) or equivalent or select a
nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring
pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Only
Mopart or equivalent is recommended. Do not use oven
cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’
protective finish.
Interior Care
Instrument Panel Surfaces
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface,
which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not
use protectants or other products, which may cause
undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to
restore the low glare surface.
Cleaning Interior Trim
Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, a damp cloth with Mopart Total Clean, then
Mopart Spot & Stain Remover if absolutely necessary. Do
not use harsh cleaners or Armorall. Use Mopart Total
Clean to clean vinyl upholstery
Cleaning Leather Upholstery
Mopart Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and Mopart Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
470 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
YES Essentialst Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
Equipped
YES Essentialst seats may be cleaned in the following
manner:
•
Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
•
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
•
For tough stains, apply Mopart Total Clean or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
•
For grease stains, apply Mopart Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
•
Do not use any solvents or protectants on Yes Essen-
tialst products.
Cleaning High Gloss Front Door and Pillar
Appliques
When cleaning the front door B-pillar appliques, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Remove all dirt with a wet soft rag. A mild soap
solution may be used, do not use high alcohol content or
abrasive cleaners. Glass cleaners are not recommended. If
soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp rag.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 471
7
2. To maintain the high gloss shine, apply a scratch and
swirl remover onto a damp cloth and apply to door
applique. Rub the applique with a firm pressure then buff
lightly with a clean cotton cloth until a high gloss shine is
achieved.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lightweight
and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass head-
lights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with Mopart Glass Cleaner or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may
scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
472 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Clean with a wet soft rag.A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the seatbelts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the seat belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
wash them.
Replace the seat belts if they appear frayed or worn or if
the buckles do not work properly.
Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cup Holders
Removal
Pull the flexible liner from the cup holder drawer;
starting at one edge to ease removal.
Cleaning
The liner is top shelf dishwasher safe, or you may follow
the cleaning procedure below.
Soak the liner in a mixture of medium hot tap water and
one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap. Let soak for
approximately 30 minutes. After 30 minutes pull the liner
from the water and dip it back into the water about six
times. This will loosen any remaining debris. Rinse the
liner thoroughly under warm running water. Shake the
excess water from the liner and dry the outer surfaces
with a clean soft cloth.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 473
7
Installation
Place the liner into the cupholder drawer and press the
liner into place so that the retention tabs seat into the
corresponding openings in the drawer.
FUSES/TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE
(TIPM)
The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is located
in the engine compartment near the battery. This center
contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses. A label that
identifies each component may be printed or embossed
on the inside of the cover.
The numbers inside the TIPM cover correspond to the
following table.
TIPM Location
474 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FUSES/TIPM
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
J1 40 Amp
Green
— Power Folding Seat
J2 30 Amp
Pink
— Power Liftgate Module
J3 40 Amp
Green
— Rear Door Module (RR
Door Node)
J4 25 Amp
Natural
— Driver Door Node
J5 25 Amp
Natural
— Passenger Door Node
J6 40 Amp
Green
— Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) Pump/ESP
J7 30 Amp
Pink
— Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) Valve
J8 40 Amp
Green
— Power Memory Seat (If
Equipped)
J9 40 Amp
Green
— PZEV Motor/Flex Fuel
FUSES/TIPM
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
J10 30 Amp
Pink
— Headlamp Wash Relay/
Manual Tuning Valve
J11 30 Amp
Pink
— Power Sliding Door
Module
J13 60 Amp
Yellow
— Ignition Off Draw (IOD)
— Main
J14 40 Amp
Green
— Rear Window Defogger
J15 30 Amp
Pink
— Rear Blower
J17 40 Amp
Green
— Starter Solenoid
J18 20 Amp
Yellow
— Powertrain Control Mod-
ule (PCM) Trans Range
J19 60 Amp
Yellow
— Radiator Fan
J20 30 Amp
Pink
— Front Wiper LO/HI
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 475
7
FUSES/TIPM
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
J21 20 Amp
Yellow
— Front/Rear Washer
J22 25 Amp
Natural
— Sunroof Module
M1 — 15 Amp
Blue
Center High Mounted
Stop Light (CHMSL)/
Brake Switch
M2 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Trailer Lighting
M3 — 20 Amp
Yellow
—
M4 — 10 Amp
Red
Trailer Tow
M5 — 25 Amp
Natural
Inverter
M6 — 20 Amp
Yellow
—
FUSES/TIPM
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
M7 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Power Outlet #2 (BATT/
ACC SELECT)
M8 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Front Heated Seat (If
Equipped)
M9 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Rear Heated Seat (If
Equipped)
M10 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Ignition Off Draw — Ve-
hicle Entertainment Sys-
tem (IOD-VES), Satellite
Digital Audio Receiver
(SDARS), DVD, Hands-
Free Module (HFM),
Universal Garage Door
Opener (UGDO), Vanity
Lamp (VANITY LP)
M11 — 10 Amp
Red
(Ignition Off Draw) IOD-
HVAC/ATC, MW
SENSR, Underhood
Lamp (UH LMP)
476 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FUSES/TIPM
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
M12 — 30 Amp
Green
Amplifier (AMP)
M13 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Ignition Off Draw—
Cabin Compartment
Node (IOD-CCN), Wire-
less Control Module
(WCM), SIREN, Clock
Module (CLK MOD),
Multi-Function Control
Switch (MULTIFCTN
SW)
M14 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Trailer Tow (Export
Only)
FUSES/TIPM
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
M15 — 20 Amp
Yellow
COL MOD, IR SNS,
Heater Ventilation, Air
Conditioning/Automatic
Temperature Control
(HVAC/ATC), Rear View
Mirror (RR VW MIR),
Cabin Compartment
Node (CCN), Transfer
Case Switch (T-CASE
SW), RUN/ST, Multi-
Function Control Switch
(MULTIFTCN SW), Tire
Pressure Monitor (TPM),
Glow Plug Module
(GLW PLG MOD) — Ex-
port Diesel Only
M16 — 10 Amp
Red
Occupant Restraint
Controller/Occupant
Classification Module
(ORC/OCM)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 477
7
FUSES/TIPM
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
M17 — 15 Amp
Blue
Left Tail/License/Park
Lamp (LT-TAIL/LIC/
PRK LMP)
M18 — 15 Amp
Blue
Right Tail/Park/Run
Lamp (RT-TAIL/PRK/
RUN LMP)
M19 — 25 Amp
Natural
Auto Shut Down (ASD
#1 and #2)
M20 — 15 Amp
Blue
Cabin Compartment
Node Interior Light
(CCN INT LIGHT),
Switch Bank (SW
BANK), Steering Control
Module (SCM)
M21 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Auto Shut Down (ASD
#3)
M22 — 10 Amp
Red
Right Horn (RT HORN
(HI/LOW)
FUSES/TIPM
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
M23 — 10 Amp
Red
Left Horn (LT HORN
(HI/LOW)
M24 — 25 Amp
Natural
Rear Wiper (REAR
WIPER)
M25 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Fuel Pump (FUEL
PUMP), Diesel Lift
Pump (DSL LIFT PUMP)
— Export Only
M26 — 10 Amp
Red
Power Mirror Switch
(PWR MIRR SW), Driver
Window Switch (DRVR
WIND SW)
M27 — 10 Amp
Red
Ignition Switch (IGN
SW), Window Module
(WIN MOD)
M28 — 10 Amp
Red
Next Generation Control-
ler (NGC), Transmission
Feed (TRANS FEED),
J1962
478 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FUSES/TIPM
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
M29 — 10 Amp
Red
Occupant Classification
Module (OCM)
M30 — 15 Amp
Blue
Rear Wiper Module (RR
WIPER MOD), Power
Folding Mirror (PWR
FOLD MIR)
M31 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Back-Up Lamps (B/U
LAMPS)
M32 — 10 Amp
Red
Occupant Restraint Con-
troller (ORC), TT EU-
ROPE
M33 — 10 Amp
Red
Next Generation Control-
ler (NGC), Global Power-
train Engine Controller
(GPEC)
FUSES/TIPM
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
M34 — 10 Amp
Red
Park Assist (PRK ASST),
Heater Ventilation, Air
Conditioning Module
(HVAC MOD), Head-
lamp Wash (HDLP
WASH), Compass (COM-
PAS)
M35 — 10 Amp
Red
Heated Mirrors
M36 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Power Outlet #3 (BATT)
M37 — 10 Amp
Red
Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), Electronic Stabil-
ity Program (ESP), Stop
Lamp Switch (STP LP
SW), Fuel Pump Rly Hi
Control
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 479
7
FUSES/TIPM
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
M38 — 25 Amp
Natural
Lock/Unlock Motors
(LOCK/UNLOCK
MTRS)
CAUTION!
•
When installing the Integrated Power Module
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is prop-
erly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the Integrated Power
Module, and possibly result in a electrical system
failure.
•
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system over-
load. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
480 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The Heated Mirrors, Lower Instrument Panel Power
Outlet and Removable Floor Console, when in the front
position are fused with self-resetting fuses that are only
serviceable by an authorized dealer. The power seats are
fused by a 30 Amp circuit breaker located under the
driver’s seat. The Power Windows are fused by a 25 Amp
circuit breaker located under the instrument panel near
the steering column. If you experience temporary or
permanent loss of these systems, see your authorized
dealer for service.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days you may want to take steps to protect your battery.
You may do the following:
•
Remove the 20 Amp mini-fuse in the Integrated Power
Module labeled Ignition-Off Draw (IOD).
•
Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
•
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning
system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air
and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate
system lubrication to minimize the possibility of com-
pressor damage when the system is started again.
REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS
LIGHT BULBS — Interior Bulb Number
Center & Rear Dome Light..................578
Center & Rear Reading Lights ...............578
Front Door Courtesy Light ..................578
Front Header Reading Lights — If Equipped .....578
Instrument Cluster Lights .................PC74
Liftgate Light(s)..........................578
Overhead Console Reading Lights ..........PC579
Removable Console Light — If Equipped .......194
Visor Vanity Lights ....................6501966
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 481
7
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your dealer for replace-
ment.
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass
cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved
and should not be used for replacement.
LIGHT BULBS — Exterior Bulb Number
Backup, Tail, Stop Light ...................3157
Center High-Mounted Stop Light . . . LED (See Note 1)
Fog Light — If Equipped ..................9145
Front Side Marker,
Park/Turn Signal. ..............P27/7Wor3157
Headlight .............................H13
License................................168
Note 1: The Center High-Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL)
uses LED lights that are not serviceable separately. The
CHMSL must be replaced as an assembly, see your
authorized Dealer.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlights
1.
Raise the hood to access the rear of the headlight housing.
2. Slide the red lock tab rearward on the connector, then
depress the tab and remove the connector from the bulb.
3. Twist the headlight bulb and pull the bulb from
headlight housing.
4. Install the new headlight bulb and twist until locked
into the headlight housing.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
482 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Connect the wiring connector to bulb and slide red
lock tab forward.
Front Park/Turn Signal and Side Marker Lights
1. Raise the hood to access the rear of the headlight
housing.
2. Twist the turn signal socket and remove from the
headlight housing, then pull the bulb out.
3. Push the new bulb into the socket and reinstall the
socket by twisting until locked into the headlight hous-
ing.
Fog Lights
NOTE: Access to the fog light bulb is from the rear of
the fascia. On the left rear side of the fascia, remove the
push pin and lower the hinged access door on the air
dam.
1. From behind the bumper fascia, or the access panel on
the air dam, twist the bulb counterclockwise, and remove
bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
2. Disconnect wire harness from the bulb.
3. Reconnect the wiring harness to the new bulb and
reinstall the bulb by twisting clockwise.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 483
7
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, Side Marker and
Backup Lights
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Remove the tail light assembly by removing the two
screws from the inboard side. Use a fiber stick or similar
tool to gently pry the light on the outboard side to
disengage the two ball studs.
NOTE:
•
If a screwdriver is used, make sure a soft material is
placed between the vehicle body and tool so not to
scratch the paint.
•
The PRY location is best closest to the studs while
dislodging them separately.
Removing Tail Light Assembly
484 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Twist the socket and remove form the light assembly.
4. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
5. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the
light assembly.
Center High-Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL)
The CHMSL uses LED lights that are not serviceable
separately. The CHMSL must be replaced as an assembly,
see your authorized Dealer.
License Light
The light for the license plate light is located under the
tailgate light bar and above the license plate.
1. Using a small screwdriver, press inward the locking
tab on the outboard side of the light assembly and pull
down on the light assembly for removal.
2. Twist and remove the socket from the light assembly
and pull the bulb out to remove.
3. Push the bulb into the socket, twist the socket into the
light assembly and reinstall the light assembly into place
ensuring the locking tab is secure.
1 — Stop, Tail, Turn Signal
bulb combo
2 — Backup Bulb
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 485
7
FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES
FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES U.S. Metric
Fuel (approximate)
All Engines 20 Gals 76 L
Engine Oil with Filter
3.3L and 3.8L (SAE 5W-20 API Certified) 5.0 Qts 4.7 L
4.0L (SAE 10W-30 API Certified) 5.5 Qts 5.2 L
Cooling System
3
3.3L, 3.8L and 4.0L (Use Mopart Antifreeze/Coolant Five Year/
100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent.)
13.4 Qts 12.6 L
3
Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level. Add 2.9 Qts (2.8 L) if equipped with a rear
heater
486 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS — ENGINE
Component Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Coolant Mopart Antifreeze/Coolant Five Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology) or equivalent
Oil – 3.3L, 3.8L Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 engine oil. Refer to your oil filler cap for correct SAE
grade, meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
Oil – 4.0L Use API Certified SAE 10W-30 engine oil. Refer to your oil filler cap for correct SAE
grade, meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
Oil Filter – 3.3L, 3.8L Mopart 4105409 or equivalent
Oil Filter – 4.0L Mopar 5281090 or equivalent. Refer to your oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Spark Plugs – 3.3L, 3.8L,
4.0L
ZFR5LP-13G (Gap.050 in / 1.27 mm)
Fuel – 3.3L, 3.8L 87 Octane
Fuel – 4.0L 87 Octane Acceptable — 89 Recommended
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 487
7
Chassis
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS — CHASSIS
Component Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Automatic Transmission Mopart ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid
Brake Master Cylinder Mopart DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or
equivalent. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then
DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake flu-
ids.
Power Steering Reservoir Mopart Power Steering Fluid +4 or Mopart ATF+4 Au-
tomatic Transmission Fluid
488 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type,
must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure
the continued proper functioning of the Emissions Con-
trol System. These, and all other maintenance services
included in this manual, should be done to provide best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-
tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving.
Inspection and service should also be done anytime a
malfunction is suspected.
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emis-
sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
individual using any automotive part that has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or in the State of Califor-
nia, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles CHAngE OIL will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis-
played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Based on engine operation conditions the oil change
indicator message will illuminate, this means that service
is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced
as soon as possible, within the next 500 mi (805 km).
490 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
NOTE:
•
The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s
oil if it has been six months since your last oil change
even if the oil change indicator message is NOT
illuminated.
•
Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
•
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 6,000 mi (10 000 km) or six months, whichever
comes first.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If this
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your dealer, the message can be reset by referring to
the steps described under “Oil Change Required” in “Use
Factory Settings” of the EVIC section in this manual or
under “Odometer/Trip Odometer” in the “Instrument
Cluster Descriptions section of this manual.
At Each Stop For Fuel
•
Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level
while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the
accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when
the level is at or below the ADD, SAFE or MIN mark.
•
Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
Once A Month
•
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
•
Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 491
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
•
Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, power steering and transmission and
add as needed.
•
Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
At Each Oil Change
•
Change the engine oil filter.
•
Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
492 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Required Maintenance Intervals
Perform Maintenance Every (Where time and mileage
are listed, follow the interval that occurs first.)
Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. 6,000 10 000 6
Rotate Tires. 6,000 10 000 6
If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty
or off-road conditions. Inspect the engine air cleaner
filter, replace if necessary.
12,000 20 000 12
Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary. 12,000 20 000 12
Replace the air conditioning filter. 12,000 20 000 12
Inspect the CV Joints. Perform the first inspection at
12,000 mi (20 000 km) or 12 months.
24,000 40 000 24
Inspect Exhaust System. Perform the first inspection at
12,000 mi (20 000 km) or 12 months.
24,000 40 000 24
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot
seals, replace if necessary.
24,000 40 000 24
Replace the engine air cleaner filter. 30,000 50 000 30
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 493
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Perform Maintenance Every (Where time and mileage
are listed, follow the interval that occurs first.)
Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months
Change the automatic transmission fluid & filter if
using your vehicle for any of the following: police,
taxi, fleet or frequent trailer towing.
60,000 100 000 60
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. † 90,000 150 000 90
Flush and replace the engine coolant. 102,000 170 000 60
Replace the ignition cables on 3.3L, 3.8L engines. 102,000 170 000 102
Replace the spark plugs on 3.3L, 3.8L, 4.0L engines. 102,000 170 000 102
Replace the timing belt on 4.0L engines. 102,000 170 000 102
Change the automatic transmission fluid & filter. 120,000 200 000 120
Replace Accessory Drive Belt(s). 120,000 200 000 120
† This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner, but is not required to maintain emissions
warranty.
494 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 495
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
m Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle ..............................499
▫ Prepare For The Appointment ............499
▫ Prepare A List ........................499
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests .............499
m If You Need Assistance ...................499
▫ Chrysler LLC Customer Center ...........500
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center ......501
▫ In Mexico Contact .....................501
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) .............501
▫ Service Contract ......................501
m Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) .....502
m MOPARtParts .........................503
m Reporting Safety Defects ..................503
▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C. .....................503
▫ In Canada ..........................503
m Publication Order Forms ..................504
9
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized selling dealer. They know you and the vehicle
best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 499
9
high quality service. The manufacturer’s authorized deal-
ers have the facilities, factory-trained technicians, special
tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is
fixed correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
•
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer-
ship. They want to know if you need assistance.
•
If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact the Manufacturer’s Cus-
tomer Center.
Any communication to the Manufacturer’s Customer
Center should include the following information:
•
Owner’s name and address
•
Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
•
Authorized dealership name
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
Chrysler LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 992-1997
500 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465–2001
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-4568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer
Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for an vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s Service Contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s Service Contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hot-
line at 1-800-521-9922.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s Service Contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s Service Contract. If you purchased a
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 501
9
service contract that is not a manufacturer’s Service
Contract, and you require service after the manufactur-
er’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer
to the contract documents, and contact the person listed
in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod-
ucts of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of Chrysler LLC warranties applicable to this
vehicle.
502 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
MOPART PARTS
Mopart fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They will help keep
the vehicle operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– 9153),
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administra-
tor, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C.
20590. You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to:
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 503
9
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
•
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler LLC
vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the ve-
hicle, system, and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,
and charts.
•
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia-
grams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practi-
cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled ve-
hicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-
step troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.
•
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific Chrysler LLC vehicles.
Included are starting, operating, emergency and main-
tenance procedures as well as specifications, capabili-
ties and safety tips.
504 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Call toll free at:
•
1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
•
1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
•
www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 505
9
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
506 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
10
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ..........458
Adding Fuel ...........................382
Adding Washer Fluid .....................455
Additives, Fuel .........................380
Adjustable Pedals .......................177
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 445
Air Conditioner Maintenance ...............450
Air Conditioning ........................301
Air Conditioning Controls .................301
Air Conditioning Filter .................320,451
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ............319
Air Conditioning, Rear Zone .............307,314
Air Conditioning Refrigerant ...............450
Air Conditioning System .............301,309,450
Air Conditioning System, Zone Control ........305
Air Pressure, Tires .......................358
Airbag ..............................66,74
Airbag Deployment .......................75
Airbag Light ...................67,73,77,94,233
Airbag Maintenance .......................76
Airbag, Side ........................68,72,74
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) ...........70,72,74
Alarm Light ...........................233
Alarm (Security Alarm) ....................18
Alignment and Balance ...................366
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle .............7
Antenna, Satellite Radio ...................288
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...........457,458,486
Disposal ............................459
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ..............338
Anti-Lock Warning Light ...............227,339
Anti-Theft System ........................18
Appearance Care ........................467
Ashtray ...............................201
Assistance Towing .......................117
Audio Systems (Radio) .................280,283
Auto Down Power Windows ................39
Auto Up Power Windows ................40,194
508 INDEX
Automatic Dimming Mirror ................100
Automatic Door Locks ...................34,35
Automatic Headlights ....................163
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .........309
Automatic Transaxle ......................328
Adding Fluid .........................465
Fluid Level Check ......................465
Interlock System .......................329
Reset Mode ..........................334
Selection Of Lubricant ................465,488
Shifting .............................330
Special Additives ......................467
Automatic Transmission ................464,467
Adding Fluid ......................466,467
Fluid and Filter Changes .................467
Fluid Change .........................467
Fluid Level Check ......................466
Fluid Type ........................465,488
Ball Joints .............................453
Battery ...............................448
Gas Caution ..........................449
Jump Starting .........................425
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) .......26
Saving Feature (Protection) ...............166
Bearings ..............................467
Belts, Drive ............................445
Body Mechanism Lubrication ...............454
B-Pillar Location ........................353
Brake Assist System ......................341
Brake Control System, Electronic .............340
Brake Fluid ............................488
Brake, Parking ..........................335
Brake System ........................337,462
Anti-Lock (ABS) .......................338
Fluid Check ..........................463
Hoses ..............................462
Warning Light ........................228
INDEX 509
10
Brakes .............................337,462
Brake/Transmission Interlock ...............328
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle ........93
Bulb Replacement .......................482
Bulbs, Light ............................481
Calibration, Compass ..................240,246
Capacities, Fluid ........................486
Caps, Filler
Fuel ................................382
Oil (Engine) .......................434,443
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ...............458
Car Washes ............................468
Carbon Monoxide Warning .................381
Cargo Compartment
Luggage Carrier .......................215
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) ...................214
Catalytic Converter ......................446
Caution, Exhaust Gas .................51,95,381
CD (Compact Disc) Player ...............280,283
CD (Compact Disc) Player Maintenance ........300
Cellular Phone .................104,283,284,299
Center High Mounted Stop Light ............485
Chains, Tire ............................367
Changing A Flat Tire .....................412
Chart, Tire Sizing ........................350
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) .............232,438
Child Restraint ........................81,83
Child Restraint Tether Anchors ...............86
Child Safety Locks ........................46
Child Seat ..............................88
Clean Air Gasoline .......................378
Cleaning
Wheels .............................470
Climate Control .........................301
Clock ........................254,269,281,285
Coat Hook ............................214
510 INDEX
Coin Holder ...........................201
Cold Weather Operation ...................325
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance .............300
Compact Spare Tire ......................361
Compass ........................238,240,246
Compass Calibration ..................240,246
Compass Variance ....................240,247
Computer, Trip/Travel ....................244
Connector
UCI ................................292
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) .........292
Console ..............................201
Console, Floor ..........................201
Console, Overhead .......................182
Console, Removable ...................207,211
Contract, Service ........................501
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ..........458
Cooling System .........................456
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ..............458
Coolant Capacity ......................486
Coolant Level ......................456,459
Disposal of Used Coolant ................459
Drain, Flush, and Refill ..................457
Inspection ...........................459
Points to Remember ....................460
Pressure Cap .........................458
Radiator Cap .........................458
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ......457,486,487
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ..............179
Cup Holder .........................200,473
Customer Assistance .....................499
Data Recorder, Event ......................78
Daytime Running Lights ...................163
Dealer Service ..........................440
Defroster, Rear Window ...................320
Defroster, Windshield ................94,303,313
Diagnostic System, Onboard ................437
INDEX 511
10
Digital Video Disc (DVD) Player ..........280,283
Dimmer Control ........................162
Dimmer Switch, Headlight .................170
Dipsticks
Automatic Transaxle ....................465
Automatic Transmission .................466
Oil (Engine) ..........................441
Disabled Vehicle Towing ...................428
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...............459
Engine Oil ...........................444
Domelight .............................161
Door Locks .............................31
Door Locks, Automatic ....................34
Door Opener, Garage .....................185
Drive Belts ............................445
Drive Shaft Universal Joints ................454
Driving
On Slippery Surfaces ....................345
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing
Water ..............................346
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System) ......297
E-85 Fuel .............................384
Electric Remote Mirrors ................102,103
Electrical Power Outlets ...................195
Electronic Brake Control System .............340
Brake Assist System ....................341
Electronic Stability Program ...............342
Electronic Range Select (ERS) ...............333
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ......179
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) ............342
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) ....241
Emergency, In Case of
Hazard Warning Flasher .................410
Jacking ...........................412,415
Jump Starting .........................425
Overheating ..........................410
512 INDEX
Emission Control System Maintenance ......438,490
Engine ........................93,434,435,436
Air Cleaner ..........................445
Block Heater .........................327
Break-In Recommendations ................93
Checking Oil Level .....................441
Compartment ......................435,436
Coolant (Antifreeze) ....................487
Cooling .............................456
Exhaust Gas Caution ..................51,381
Flooded, Starting ......................326
Fuel Requirements ..................377,486
Oil ...........................441,486,487
Oil Change Interval ....................442
Oil Disposal ..........................444
Oil Filler Cap ......................434,443
Oil Filter Disposal ......................444
Oil Selection .......................442,486
Oil Synthetic .........................444
Operation ............................93
Overheating ..........................410
Starting .............................324
Temperature Gauge .....................226
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ..........74
Event Data Recorder ......................78
Exhaust Gas Caution ..............51,95,381,448
Exhaust System .........................447
Extender, Seat Belt ........................66
Exterior Folding Mirrors ...................102
Fabric Care .........................470,471
Filler Location Fuel ......................226
Filters
Air Cleaner ..........................445
Air Conditioning ....................320,451
Engine Oil ........................444,487
Engine Oil Disposal ....................444
INDEX 513
10
Flashers
Hazard Warning .......................410
Turn Signal .....................227,483,484
Flash-To-Pass ...........................170
Flat Tire Stowage ........................422
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range ........................387
Engine Oil ...........................387
Fuel Requirements ..................384,386
Maintenance ..........................388
Replacement Parts .....................387
Starting .............................387
Flooded Engine Starting ...................326
Floor Console ..........................201
Fluid Capacities .........................486
Fluid Leaks .............................94
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transaxle ....................465
Automatic Transmission .................466
Brake ...............................463
Power Steering ........................452
Fluids ................................487
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts ..........487
Fog Light Service ........................483
Fog Lights .......................165,233,483
Fold in Floor (Stow 8n Go) Seating ...........138
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ...................427
Fuel .................................377
Adding .............................382
Additives ............................380
Clean Air ............................378
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .................226,382
Filler Door (Gas Cap) ...................226
Gasoline ............................377
Gauge ..............................226
Hoses ..............................461
Light ...............................234
Octane Rating ........................487
514 INDEX
Requirements ......................377,486
System Hoses .........................461
Tank Capacity ........................486
Fuel, Flexible .............See Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Fuel System Caution .....................380
Fueling ...............................382
Fuses ................................474
Garage Door Opener (HomeLinkt) ...........185
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ...............382,384
Gasoline, Clean Air ......................378
Gasoline (Fuel) .........................377
Gasoline, Reformulated ...................379
Gauges
Coolant Temperature ....................226
Fuel ................................226
Speedometer .........................227
Tachometer ..........................229
Gearshift ..............................330
General Information ...............18,27,131,377
Glass Cleaning ..........................472
Grocery Bag Retainer .....................155
Gross Axle Weight Rating ...............389,394
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating .............389,393
Hands-Free Phone (UConnect™) .......104,283,284
Hard Drive (HDD) ....................280,283
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water ........................346
Hazard Warning Flasher ...................410
Head Restraints .........................134
Headlights ............................163
Bulb Replacement ......................482
Cleaning ............................472
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ........170
Lights On Reminder ....................165
On With Wipers .......................164
INDEX 515
10
Passing .............................170
Replacing ............................482
Time Delay ..........................164
Heated Seats ...........................135
Heater ...............................301
Heater, Engine Block .....................327
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 170
Hitches
Trailer Towing ........................397
HomeLinkt (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 185
Hood Release ..........................158
Hook, Coat ............................214
Hoses ................................461
Ignition ...............................14
Key ...............................12,14
Ignition Key Removal .....................14
Illuminated Entry ........................20
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ...................15
Infant Restraint ........................81,83
Information Center, Vehicle .................241
Inside Rearview Mirror ...................100
Instrument Cluster .................224,225,226
Instrument Panel and Controls ..............223
Instrument Panel Cover ...................470
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning .............472
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) ............474
Interior Appearance Care ..................470
Interior Lights .......................160,162
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ...........169
Introduction .............................4
Jack Location ...........................413
Jack Operation ..........................412
Jump Starting ..........................425
Key, Programming ........................17
Key, Replacement ........................16
516 INDEX
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ...................15
Key-In Reminder .........................15
Keyless Entry System ......................21
Keys .................................12
Knee Bolster ............................67
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................57
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren)
...86
Latches
Hood ...............................158
Lead Free Gasoline ......................377
Life of Tires ............................364
Liftgate ................................48
Lights ..............................94,160
Airbag ......................67,73,77,94,233
Alarm ..............................233
Anti-Lock .........................227,339
Automatic Headlights ...................163
Back-Up .............................484
Battery Saver .........................166
Brake Assist Warning ...................343
Brake Warning ........................228
Bulb Replacement ...................481,482
Center Mounted Stop ...................485
Daytime Running ......................163
Dimmer Switch, Headlight .............162,170
Engine Temperature Warning ..............232
Fog ..........................165,233,483
Hazard Warning Flasher .................410
Headlight Switch ......................163
Headlights ...........................482
Headlights On Reminder .................165
Headlights On With Wipers ...............164
High Beam ...........................170
High Beam Indicator ....................227
High Beam/Low Beam Select .............170
Illuminated Entry .......................20
Interior ..........................160,162
INDEX 517
10
License .............................485
Lights On Reminder ....................165
Low Fuel ............................234
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ........232
Oil Pressure ..........................233
Park .............................162,483
Passing .............................170
Reading .............................183
Rear Servicing ........................484
Rear Tail ............................484
Seat Belt Reminder .....................233
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ..............233
Service ...........................481,482
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . 232
Side Marker ..........................484
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) ..............233
Turn Signal .....................166,483,484
Voltage .............................234
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) .....226
Load Leveling System ....................218
Loading Vehicle ...................214,388,391
Capacities ...........................391
Tires ...............................353
Locks
Door ................................31
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
...86
Lubrication, Body .......................454
Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) .................215
Lumbar Support ........................137
Maintenance Free Battery ..................448
Maintenance Procedures ...................441
Maintenance Schedule ....................490
Maintenance, Sunroof .....................195
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 232,438
Manual, Service .........................504
Map/Reading Lights .....................183
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) .............155
518 INDEX
Memory Seat ........................104,155
Mini-Trip Computer ...................238,244
Mirrors ...............................100
Automatic Dimming ....................100
Electric Remote .....................102,103
Exterior Folding .......................102
Memory .............................155
Outside .............................102
Rearview ............................100
Vanity ..............................101
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle .............7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...............369
Mopar Parts .........................440,503
MP3 Player .........................280,283
Multi-Function Control Lever ...............166
Navigation Radio ........................283
Navigation System .......................283
New Vehicle Break-In Period ................93
Occupant Restraints ...................55,72,75
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) ...........68,70,72,74
Odometer .............................229
Oil Change Indicator ................230,237,243
Oil Change Indicator, Reset ...........230,237,243
Oil, Engine .........................441,487
Capacity ............................486
Change Interval .......................442
Checking ............................441
Disposal ............................444
Filter ............................444,487
Filter Disposal ........................444
Identification Logo .....................443
Materials Added to .....................444
Recommendation ...................442,486
Synthetic ............................444
Viscosity ..........................443,486
Onboard Diagnostic System ..............437,438
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLinkt) ...........185
INDEX 519
10
Outside Rearview Mirrors ...............100,102
Overdrive .............................332
Overhead Console .......................182
Overhead Travel Information Center ..........182
Overheating, Engine ...................226,410
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ..........504
Panic Alarm ............................24
Park Sense System, Rear ...................171
Parking Brake ..........................335
Parking On Hill .........................335
Passing Light ...........................170
Pedals, Adjustable .......................177
Personal Settings ........................248
Pets, Transporting ........................89
Phone, Cellular ....................104,283,284
Phone, Hands-Free (UConnect™) .......104,283,284
Placard, Tire and Loading Information .........353
Port
Universal Serial Bus (USB) .............280,283
USB .............................280,283
Power
Brakes ..............................337
Distribution Center (Fuses) ...............474
Door Locks ...........................32
Lift Gate .............................49
Mirrors ..........................102,103
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ..........195
Seats ...............................133
Sliding Door ..........................42
Steering .............................344
Steering, Checking .....................452
Sunroof .............................192
Windows .............................37
Power Steering Fluid .....................488
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts ..............65
Preparation for Jacking ....................415
520 INDEX
Pretensioners
Seat Belts .............................64
Programmable Electronic Features ............248
Radial Ply Tires .........................361
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) .......457,458
Radio Broadcast Signals ...................251
Radio, Navigation .......................283
Radio Operation ...................281,284,299
Radio Remote Controls ....................299
Radio, Satellite ............280,281,283,284,287,297
Radio (Sound Systems) .................280,283
Rear Air Conditioning .................307,314
Rear Heater ............................307
Rear Park Sense System ...................171
Rear Window Defroster ...................320
Rearview Mirrors ........................100
Reclining Front Seats .....................136
Recorder, Event Data ......................78
Recreational Towing ...................407,429
Reminder, Seat Belt .......................64
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) .................21
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls ........299
Remote Starting System ....................28
Removable Floor Console ...............207,211
Replacement Keys ........................16
Replacement Parts .......................440
Replacement Tires .......................365
Reporting Safety Defects ...................503
Resetting Oil Change Indicator .........230,237,243
Restraint, Head .........................134
Restraints, Child .......................81,88
Restraints, Infant .........................81
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck ................427
Roof Rack (Luggage Rack) .................215
Rotation, Tires ..........................368
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .................93
INDEX 521
10
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ...............94
Safety Defects, Reporting ..................503
Safety, Exhaust Gas .......................51
Safety Information, Tire ...................348
Safety Tips .............................93
Satellite Radio ............280,281,283,284,287,297
Satellite Radio Antenna ...................288
Schedule, Maintenance ....................490
Seat Belt Maintenance ....................473
Seat Belt Reminder .......................64
Seat Belts ..............................55
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ..................62
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ........62
And Pregnant Women ...................65
Child Restraint .......................81,83
Extender .............................66
Front Seat ............................57
Pretensioners ..........................64
Rear Seat .............................57
Seats .................................131
Adjustment ..........................132
Cleaning ............................471
Easy Entry ...........................147
Fold in Floor (Stow 8nGo) ................138
Heated .............................135
Lumbar Support .......................137
Memory .............................155
Power ..............................133
Reclining ............................136
Stow 8n Go (Fold in Floor) ................138
Tilting ..............................147
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ................18
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..........457,487
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ...................15
Sentry Key Programming ...................17
Sentry Key Replacement ...................16
Service Assistance .......................499
Service Contract .........................501
522 INDEX
Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction Indicator)
. . 232
Service Manuals ........................504
Setting the Clock ................254,269,281,285
Settings, Personal ........................248
Shoulder Belts ...........................57
Signals, Turn ...................166,227,483,484
Sliding Door ............................41
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On ...............345
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .................367
Snow Tires ............................368
Sound Systems (Radio) .................280,283
Spare Tire .......................361,362,414
Spark Plugs ............................445
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ..............179
Speedometer ...........................227
Starting ...............................324
Automatic Transmission .................325
Cold Weather .........................325
Engine Fails to Start ....................326
Remote ..............................28
Starting and Operating ....................324
Starting Procedures ......................324
Steering
Column Controls ......................166
Linkage .............................453
Power ...........................344,452
Shaft Seal ............................453
Tilt Column ..........................171
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls
...299
Storage ............................208,481
Storage Bin ............................208
Storage, Vehicle ......................318,481
Storing Your Vehicle ......................481
Stow 8n Go (Fold in Floor) Seats .............138
Sun Roof ..............................192
Sunglasses Storage .......................183
Sunroof Maintenance .....................195
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag ........66
INDEX 523
10
Synthetic Engine Oil ......................444
System, Navigation ......................283
System, Remote Starting ....................28
Tachometer ............................229
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ........309
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant ........226,411
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint ...............86
Tilt Steering Column .....................171
Tip Start ...............................13
Tire and Loading Information Placard .........353
Tire Identification Number (TIN) .............352
Tire Markings ..........................348
Tire Safety Information ....................348
Tires ............................94,357,505
Aging (Life of Tires) ....................364
Air Pressure ..........................357
Alignment ...........................366
Chains ..............................367
Changing ............................412
Compact Spare ........................361
Flat Changing ........................422
General Information ....................357
High Speed ..........................360
Inflation Pressures .....................358
Jacking ...........................412,415
Life of Tires ..........................364
Load Capacity .....................353,354
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ...........369
Quality Grading .......................505
Radial ..............................361
Replacement .........................365
Rotation .............................368
Safety ...........................348,357
Sizes ...............................350
Snow Tires ...........................368
Spare Tire ...........................414
Spinning ............................363
524 INDEX
Tread Wear Indicators ...................364
Wheel Nut Torque .....................422
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ..............399
Towing ...............................393
24-Hour Towing Assistance ...............117
Disabled Vehicle .......................428
Guide ..............................398
Recreational .......................407,429
Weight ..............................398
Towing Assistance .......................117
Traction Control .........................340
Traction Control Switch ...................340
Trailer Towing ..........................393
Cooling System Tips ....................406
Hitches .............................397
Minimum Requirements .................400
Trailer and Tongue Weight ................399
Wiring ..............................404
Trailer Towing Guide .....................398
Trailer Weight ..........................398
Transaxle .............................328
Automatic ...........................328
Operation ...........................328
Overdrive ...........................332
Selection of Lubricant ................465,488
Transmission ...........................464
Automatic ...........................464
Fluid ............................465,488
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry)
..26
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLinkt) . . 185
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ........21
Transporting Pets ........................89
Tread Wear Indicators ....................364
Trip Computer ..........................238
Trip Odometer ..........................229
Turn Signals ...................166,227,483,484
UCI Connector .........................292
INDEX 525
10
UConnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) ..........104,283
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ................505
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 292
Universal Joints .........................454
Universal Serial Bus (USB) Port ...........280,283
Universal Transmitter .....................185
Unleaded Gasoline .......................377
Upholstery Care ........................470
USB Port ...........................280,283
Vanity Mirrors ..........................101
Variance, Compass ....................240,247
Vehicle Certification Label .................389
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............6
Vehicle Loading ...................354,388,391
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ..............7
Vehicle Storage .......................318,481
Video Entertainment System
(Rear Seat Video System) ..................297
Warning Flasher, Hazard ..................410
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description)
...226
Warnings and Cautions .....................6
Warranty Information .....................502
Washer, Adding Fluid .....................455
Washing Vehicle .........................468
Water
Driving Through ......................346
Wheel Alignment and Balance ...............366
Wheel and Wheel Trim ....................470
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care ................470
Wheel Bearings .........................467
Wheel Nut Torque .......................422
Wind Buffeting .......................41,194
Window Fogging ........................318
Windows ..............................36
Power ...............................37
Rear Vent ............................36
Windshield Washers ...................168,455
526 INDEX
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Caravan
OWNER’S MANUAL
2008
2008 Caravan
81-226-0819 Fourth Edition Printed in U.S.A.
